1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command makeindex
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes false
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
151 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
162 by the \SpecialChar LyX
167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
169 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
170 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
171 Documentation mailing list:
172 \begin_inset CommandInset href
174 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Newline newline
194 \begin_inset Note Note
197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
198 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
212 \begin_layout Standard
213 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
214 LatexCommand tableofcontents
221 \begin_layout Chapter
225 \begin_layout Section
226 What is \SpecialChar LyX
230 \begin_layout Standard
232 is a document preparation system.
233 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
234 scripts, publishable books, business
235 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
236 It is unlike most other
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
244 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
246 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 pt type, left justified, 5
263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
272 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
276 \begin_layout Standard
277 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
282 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
286 \begin_layout Standard
291 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
292 's philosophy: most importantly,
293 the format of all of the manuals.
294 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
295 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
301 manual describes that, too.
304 \begin_layout Section
309 \begin_layout Standard
310 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
311 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
313 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
314 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
318 \begin_layout Standard
319 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
320 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
321 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
323 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
324 only a vertical scrollbar.
325 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
326 The first case is large images.
327 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
328 image and use the option
339 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
342 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
343 this doesn't work for equations yet.
346 \begin_layout Standard
347 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
348 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
356 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
363 \begin_layout Section
367 \begin_layout Standard
368 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
370 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
372 Just select the manual you want to read from the
379 \begin_layout Section
380 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
384 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
391 \begin_layout Standard
392 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
393 can be configured via the menu
395 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
399 \begin_inset Index idx
402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
409 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
412 packages are available.
413 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
415 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
417 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
422 \begin_inset space \space{}
425 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
426 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
428 To force \SpecialChar LyX
429 to re-inspect your system, you should use
431 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
435 \begin_inset Index idx
438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
439 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
445 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
446 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
449 \begin_layout Section
452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
454 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
461 \begin_layout Standard
462 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
463 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
464 installed, but you will not be
465 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
466 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
467 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
468 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
469 document can always be output as plain text
473 \begin_layout Standard
474 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
475 or DocBook classes or packages.
476 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
477 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
480 \begin_layout Standard
481 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
482 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
483 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
486 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
494 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
495 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
498 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
502 \begin_inset Index idx
505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
506 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
514 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
521 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
525 \begin_layout Chapter
526 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
530 \begin_layout Section
531 Basic File Operations
532 \begin_inset Index idx
535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
544 \begin_layout Standard
549 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
550 in addition to some more advanced operations:
553 \begin_layout Itemize
575 \begin_layout Itemize
591 arg "buffer-new-template"
597 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
629 \begin_layout Itemize
643 \begin_layout Itemize
665 \begin_layout Itemize
677 arg "buffer-write-as"
683 \begin_layout Itemize
697 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \begin_layout Standard
712 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
713 a few minor differences.
716 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
727 command lists the available templates.
728 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
729 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
730 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
738 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
745 \begin_layout Standard
746 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
778 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
779 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
780 is just that — a big, blank space.
788 \begin_layout Standard
809 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
814 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
817 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
835 will reload the document from disk.
836 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
837 and want to restore it to the last save.
846 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
847 them as your changes.
850 \begin_layout Section
851 Basic Editing Features
852 \begin_inset Index idx
855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
864 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
871 \begin_layout Standard
872 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
873 can perform cut and paste operations
874 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
875 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
876 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
877 editing features and how to access
879 We will start with cut and paste.
882 \begin_layout Standard
883 As you might expect, the
887 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
888 various other editing features.
889 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
893 \begin_layout Itemize
899 \begin_inset Index idx
902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
931 \begin_layout Itemize
937 \begin_inset Index idx
940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
969 \begin_layout Itemize
975 \begin_inset Index idx
978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1023 \begin_layout Itemize
1027 \begin_inset space ~
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_inset Index idx
1040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1049 \begin_inset Index idx
1052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1077 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1083 \begin_layout Standard
1084 The first three are self-explanatory.
1085 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1086 and other programs by
1107 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1108 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1113 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1114 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1115 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1116 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1117 into individual cells.
1121 \begin_inset space ~
1126 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1127 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1131 \begin_layout Standard
1135 \begin_inset space ~
1140 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1142 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1157 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1158 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1159 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1165 \begin_inset space \space{}
1168 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1169 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1175 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1177 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1185 \begin_inset space ~
1194 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1195 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1197 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1201 \begin_inset space ~
1206 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1207 start a new paragraph.
1208 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1209 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1217 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1234 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1237 paste from the primary selection.
1238 This is normally the currently selected text.
1241 \begin_layout Standard
1244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1246 \begin_inset space ~
1250 \begin_inset space ~
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1268 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1274 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1277 \begin_inset space ~
1286 \begin_inset space ~
1291 button to skip the current word.
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1300 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1304 \begin_inset space ~
1309 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1311 If the toggle is set, searching for
1312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1323 will not match the word
1324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1338 Match whole words only
1340 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1341 to only find complete words, e.
1342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1371 offers also an advanced
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1378 \begin_inset space ~
1383 feature that is described in section
1384 \begin_inset space ~
1388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1390 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1397 \begin_layout Standard
1398 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1399 \begin_inset space \space{}
1403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1411 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1413 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1418 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1425 \begin_layout Standard
1429 arg "inset-select-all"
1432 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1433 When the cursor is inside an inset
1436 arg "inset-select-all"
1439 selects the content of the inset.
1443 arg "inset-select-all"
1446 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1451 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1454 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1458 \begin_layout Section
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset Index idx
1473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1482 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1489 \begin_layout Standard
1490 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1560 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1564 \begin_layout Section
1566 \begin_inset Index idx
1569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1578 \begin_layout Standard
1579 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1582 \begin_layout Enumerate
1587 \begin_layout Itemize
1592 once anywhere in the edit window.
1593 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1597 \begin_layout Enumerate
1602 \begin_layout Itemize
1609 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1612 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1615 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1616 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1619 \begin_layout Itemize
1620 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1623 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1630 \begin_layout Enumerate
1631 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1635 \begin_layout Standard
1636 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1637 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1641 \begin_layout Section
1643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1645 name "sec:Navigating"
1650 \begin_inset Index idx
1653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1662 \begin_layout Standard
1664 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1667 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1673 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1676 \begin_layout Itemize
1677 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1679 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1681 \begin_inset space ~
1686 or by the toolbar button
1689 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1695 \begin_layout Itemize
1696 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1698 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1701 and use the same menu to return to them.
1702 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1705 \begin_layout Standard
1709 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1714 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1717 \begin_inset space ~
1722 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1723 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1724 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1725 your last editing position.
1728 \begin_layout Standard
1733 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1737 \begin_layout Subsection
1739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1741 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1750 Navigating ! Outline
1756 \begin_inset Index idx
1759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1770 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1771 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1773 \begin_inset space ~
1777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1779 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1783 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1784 \begin_inset space ~
1788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1790 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1795 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1799 \begin_layout Standard
1800 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1801 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1802 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1803 dialog and to modify the citation.
1806 \begin_layout Standard
1811 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1812 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1814 Labels and References
1816 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1825 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1828 \begin_layout Standard
1829 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1830 you further to control the display.
1835 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1836 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1842 option keeps it in the current view state.
1843 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1847 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1848 \begin_inset space ~
1851 3, the subsections of sections
1852 \begin_inset space ~
1855 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1860 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1861 \begin_inset space ~
1865 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1875 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1878 \begin_layout Standard
1885 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1886 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1900 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1901 So, for example, you can move section
1902 \begin_inset space ~
1906 \begin_inset space ~
1909 2.4 or after section
1910 \begin_inset space ~
1915 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1928 (or the corresponding key bindings
1936 ) you can change the level of sections.
1937 So you can for example make section
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1946 \begin_inset space ~
1952 \begin_layout Standard
1953 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1954 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1957 \begin_layout Subsection
1958 Horizontal Scrolling
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1963 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1973 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1979 \begin_inset space \space{}
1983 \begin_inset space ~
1986 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1987 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1988 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1992 \begin_layout Standard
1993 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1997 \begin_layout Itemize
1999 is used on a small tablet computer
2002 \begin_layout Itemize
2003 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2015 \begin_inset space ~
2028 \begin_layout Itemize
2029 Math constructs with long command names
2032 \begin_layout Standard
2033 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2034 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2036 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2037 windows so that table
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2044 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2049 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2051 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2052 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2055 \begin_layout Standard
2056 \begin_inset Float table
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2068 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2072 Horizontal scrolling test.
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2082 \begin_inset Tabular
2083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2084 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2129 \begin_layout Section
2130 Input/Word Completion
2131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2133 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2138 \begin_inset Index idx
2141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2148 \begin_inset Index idx
2151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2182 \begin_layout Standard
2184 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2186 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2187 is used to propose completions.
2190 \begin_layout Standard
2191 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2194 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2199 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2210 \begin_inset space ~
2215 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2219 \begin_inset space ~
2224 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2225 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2229 \begin_inset space ~
2235 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2236 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2237 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2238 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2241 \begin_layout Standard
2243 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2244 completions available.
2249 key to accept a proposed completion.
2250 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2251 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2252 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2259 \begin_layout Standard
2260 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2261 ing options for text.
2262 The special math option
2266 enables characters to be composed.
2267 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2268 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2271 , you can then input the characters
2272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2283 to a formula to get it.
2284 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2285 of the math toolbar.
2286 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2290 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2291 's installation folder.
2292 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2301 \begin_layout Section
2303 \begin_inset Index idx
2306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2313 \begin_inset Index idx
2316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2345 \begin_inset Index idx
2348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2379 \begin_layout Standard
2380 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2394 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2397 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2401 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2402 \begin_inset space ~
2406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2408 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2415 \begin_layout Standard
2419 \begin_inset space ~
2427 \begin_inset space ~
2448 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2452 \begin_layout Labeling
2453 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2457 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2458 LatexCommand nomenclature
2460 description "Tabulator key"
2467 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2469 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2470 \begin_inset space ~
2474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2476 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2483 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2487 , especially section
2488 \begin_inset space ~
2492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2494 reference "subsec:Lists"
2500 If you are still confused, look in the
2505 \begin_inset Newline newline
2513 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2514 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2518 \begin_layout Labeling
2519 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2523 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2524 LatexCommand nomenclature
2526 description "Escape key"
2534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2541 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2542 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2545 \begin_layout Labeling
2546 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2556 \begin_inset space ~
2563 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2564 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2568 \begin_layout Standard
2569 There are three modifier keys:
2572 \begin_layout Labeling
2573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2591 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2592 LatexCommand nomenclature
2594 description "Control key"
2599 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2600 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2604 \begin_layout Itemize
2613 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2616 \begin_layout Itemize
2625 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2628 \begin_layout Itemize
2637 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2641 \begin_layout Labeling
2642 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2660 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2661 LatexCommand nomenclature
2663 description "Shift key"
2668 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2669 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2672 \begin_layout Labeling
2673 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2691 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2692 LatexCommand nomenclature
2694 description "Alt or Meta key"
2699 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2700 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2701 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2707 \begin_inset Newline newline
2710 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2712 menu accelerator keys
2715 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2716 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2720 \begin_layout Standard
2721 For example, the sequence
2722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2728 \begin_inset space ~
2732 \begin_inset space ~
2738 \begin_inset space ~
2746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2765 \begin_inset space ~
2771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2781 \begin_layout Standard
2786 manual lists all other things bound to the
2794 \begin_layout Standard
2795 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2797 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2798 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2799 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2800 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2801 The \SpecialChar LyX
2802 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2803 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2804 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2806 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2822 followed by a capital
2829 \begin_layout Chapter
2832 \begin_inset Index idx
2835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2845 \begin_layout Section
2847 \begin_inset Index idx
2850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2859 \begin_layout Subsection
2863 \begin_layout Standard
2864 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2865 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2866 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2867 numbering schemes, and so on.
2868 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2869 and format the title of your document differently.
2872 \begin_layout Standard
2877 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2878 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2879 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2880 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2881 picks one for you by default.
2882 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2885 \begin_layout Subsection
2887 \begin_inset Index idx
2890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2899 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2906 \begin_layout Standard
2907 You can select a class using the
2909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2910 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2914 \begin_inset Index idx
2917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2924 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2932 \begin_layout Standard
2933 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2938 \begin_layout Description
2939 Article for basic articles
2942 \begin_layout Description
2943 Report for basic reports
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 Book for writing a book
2950 \begin_layout Description
2951 Letter for US-style letters
2954 \begin_layout Standard
2955 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2956 only uses if you have installed
2957 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2959 distributions will include
2961 Here are some of the classes.
2962 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2964 Special Document Classes
2973 \begin_layout Description
2974 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2977 \begin_layout Description
2978 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2982 \begin_layout Description
2983 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2987 \begin_layout Description
2988 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2989 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2990 There are three article layouts available.
2991 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2992 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2993 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2994 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2999 sequential numbering
3000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3003 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3004 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3005 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3006 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3009 \begin_layout Description
3010 Beamer Layout for presentations
3013 \begin_layout Description
3014 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3015 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3016 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3017 with \SpecialChar LyX
3021 \begin_layout Description
3022 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3025 \begin_layout Description
3027 \begin_inset space ~
3030 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3033 \begin_layout Description
3034 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 Foils Used to make transparencies
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3043 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3044 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3045 with \SpecialChar LyX
3049 \begin_layout Description
3050 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3051 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3054 \begin_layout Description
3055 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3058 \begin_layout Description
3059 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3062 \begin_layout Description
3063 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3064 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3065 (Is used by this document.)
3068 \begin_layout Description
3069 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3072 \begin_layout Description
3073 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3076 \begin_layout Description
3081 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3082 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3084 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3088 \begin_layout Description
3089 Slides Used to make transparencies
3092 \begin_layout Description
3094 \begin_inset space ~
3097 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3098 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3101 \begin_layout Description
3102 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3105 \begin_layout Standard
3106 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3108 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3110 Special Document Classes
3117 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3118 of the document classes.
3121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3125 \begin_layout Standard
3126 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3131 \begin_inset Index idx
3134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3151 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3152 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3154 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3157 \begin_layout Standard
3160 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3165 , are highly specialized.
3167 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3168 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3169 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3170 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3171 by some document class.
3172 There are just too many of them.
3173 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3176 \begin_layout Standard
3177 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3185 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3186 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3187 document class for a new file.
3189 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3192 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3199 manual for information on how to install them.
3200 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3206 \begin_layout Standard
3207 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3208 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3209 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3210 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3211 class files to be used for dissertation
3212 s submitted to those universities.
3213 The \SpecialChar LyX
3214 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3216 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3220 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3226 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3233 name "subsec:Modules"
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3250 \begin_layout Standard
3251 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3252 chosen document class.
3253 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3254 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3265 \begin_inset Index idx
3268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3275 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3279 \begin_layout Standard
3280 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3281 packages or file format converters that are not always
3282 installed by default.
3284 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3285 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3286 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3287 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3289 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3290 file without the missing prerequisites.
3291 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3292 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3295 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3299 \begin_inset Index idx
3302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3303 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3309 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3314 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3317 \begin_layout Standard
3318 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3326 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3328 will advise you about these things.
3336 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3340 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3345 \begin_inset Index idx
3348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3349 Document ! Local Layout
3357 \begin_layout Standard
3358 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3359 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3360 : They are intended to be used in
3361 a variety of different documents.
3362 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3363 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3364 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3365 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3366 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3368 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3386 manual for information on how to use it.
3389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3393 \begin_layout Standard
3394 Each class has a default set of options.
3395 Here's a quick table describing them:
3398 \begin_layout Standard
3399 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3405 \begin_layout Standard
3407 \begin_inset Tabular
3408 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3409 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3868 \begin_layout Standard
3869 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3876 You're probably also wondering what
3877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3881 \begin_inset space ~
3885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3889 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3890 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3895 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3900 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3910 headings, there are also
3918 headings, and so on.
3919 We will describe these headings fully in section
3920 \begin_inset space ~
3924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3926 reference "subsec:Headings"
3933 \begin_layout Subsection
3935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3937 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3942 \begin_inset Index idx
3945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3952 \begin_inset Index idx
3955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3964 \begin_layout Standard
3965 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3967 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3974 \begin_inset space ~
3982 \begin_inset space ~
3987 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3989 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3990 doesn't support special options you want to
3991 use for your document.
3992 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3993 -class and its options, you have to read
3997 \begin_layout Standard
4001 \begin_inset space ~
4008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4014 \begin_inset space ~
4019 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4020 You can choose between the following five options:
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4029 Use default page style of current class.
4032 \begin_layout Labeling
4033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4038 No page numbers or headings.
4041 \begin_layout Labeling
4042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4050 \begin_layout Labeling
4051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4056 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4057 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4058 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4059 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4062 \begin_layout Labeling
4063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4068 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4069 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4086 How they are defined is explained in section
4087 \begin_inset space ~
4091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4093 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4100 \begin_layout Standard
4101 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4102 \begin_inset space ~
4106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4108 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4115 \begin_layout Subsection
4116 Paper Size and Orientation
4117 \begin_inset Index idx
4120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4121 Document ! Paper size
4127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4129 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4136 \begin_layout Standard
4137 You can find the following options in the menu
4140 \begin_inset space ~
4147 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4151 \begin_inset Index idx
4154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4163 \begin_layout Labeling
4164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4168 \begin_inset space ~
4173 What size paper to print on.
4178 \begin_layout Itemize
4184 \begin_layout Itemize
4190 \begin_layout Itemize
4196 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 \begin_layout Itemize
4205 US letter, US legal, US executive
4208 \begin_layout Itemize
4214 \begin_layout Itemize
4221 \begin_layout Labeling
4222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4227 To choose whether to output as
4238 \begin_layout Labeling
4239 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4243 \begin_inset space ~
4248 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4249 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4252 \begin_layout Subsection
4254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4256 name "subsec:Margins"
4261 \begin_inset Index idx
4264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4271 \begin_inset Index idx
4274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4283 \begin_layout Standard
4284 Paper margins are set in the menu
4286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4290 \begin_inset Index idx
4293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4302 \begin_layout Standard
4303 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4304 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4305 the paper format and the font size into account.
4308 \begin_layout Subsection
4312 \begin_layout Standard
4313 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4319 That includes the paragraph environments.
4320 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4321 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4322 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4324 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4333 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4335 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4336 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4337 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4340 \begin_layout Section
4341 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4342 \begin_inset Index idx
4345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4346 Paragraph ! Indentation
4354 \begin_layout Subsection
4356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4358 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4365 \begin_layout Standard
4366 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4367 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4371 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4372 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4373 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4374 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4378 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4384 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4385 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4386 language than English.
4388 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4391 \begin_layout Standard
4392 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4393 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4394 into \SpecialChar LyX
4396 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4399 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4401 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4402 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4403 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4410 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4411 goes to produce a printable file.
4416 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4418 gives you the ability globally to change
4422 these pre-coded spacings.
4423 We will explain more later.
4426 \begin_layout Subsection
4427 Paragraph Separation
4428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4430 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4435 \begin_inset Index idx
4438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4439 Paragraph ! Separation
4447 \begin_layout Standard
4455 \begin_inset space ~
4463 \begin_inset space ~
4470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4474 \begin_inset Index idx
4477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4483 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4486 \begin_layout Subsection
4490 \begin_layout Standard
4491 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4496 \begin_inset space ~
4501 dialog and toggle the
4504 \begin_inset space ~
4509 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4512 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4516 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4517 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4522 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4523 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4526 \begin_layout Subsection
4528 \begin_inset Index idx
4531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4532 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4540 \begin_layout Standard
4543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4547 \begin_inset Index idx
4550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4559 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4563 \begin_inset space ~
4572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4573 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4579 \begin_inset Index idx
4582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4589 installed to use this feature.
4594 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4596 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4598 \begin_inset space ~
4603 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4604 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4607 \begin_layout Section
4608 Paragraph Environments
4609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4611 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4616 \begin_inset Index idx
4619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4620 Paragraph ! Environments
4626 \begin_inset Index idx
4629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4630 Paragraph environments|(
4638 \begin_layout Subsection
4642 \begin_layout Standard
4643 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4646 \begin_layout Standard
4655 } \SpecialChar ldots
4665 \begin_inset Newline newline
4668 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4670 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4671 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4672 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4681 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4684 \begin_layout Standard
4685 A paragraph environment is simply a
4686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4693 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4694 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4695 scheme, labels, and so on.
4696 Additionally, you can
4697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4704 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4705 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4706 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4707 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4709 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4711 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4714 \begin_layout Standard
4715 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4716 \begin_inset Graphics
4717 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4723 at the left end of the toolbar.
4725 will change the environment of the
4729 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4730 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4731 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4735 \begin_layout Standard
4744 create a new paragraph using the
4748 paragraph environment.
4750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4757 because if you are in one of these environments:
4760 \begin_layout Itemize
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4772 \begin_layout Itemize
4778 \begin_layout Itemize
4784 \begin_layout Itemize
4790 \begin_layout Itemize
4796 \begin_layout Itemize
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4804 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4808 , rather than resetting it to
4813 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4814 \begin_inset space ~
4818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4820 reference "sec:Nesting"
4827 \begin_layout Subsection
4831 \begin_layout Standard
4832 The default paragraph environment is
4837 It creates a plain paragraph.
4839 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4840 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4841 this manual) are in the
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 You can nest a paragraph using the
4853 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4861 \begin_layout Subsection
4863 \begin_inset Index idx
4866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4876 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4877 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4886 for thanks or contact information.
4887 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4888 places all of this on a separate page
4889 along with today's date.
4890 For other types of documents, the title
4891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4898 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4904 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4918 Here's how you use them:
4921 \begin_layout Itemize
4922 Put the title of your document in the
4929 \begin_layout Itemize
4930 Put the author name in the
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4939 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4945 Note that using this environment is optional.
4946 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4947 will automatically insert today's date.
4948 If you don't want a date, use the option
4950 Suppress default date on front page
4954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4957 \begin_inset space ~
4965 \begin_layout Standard
4966 You can use footnotes to insert
4967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4974 or contact information.
4977 \begin_layout Subsection
4979 \begin_inset Index idx
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4991 name "subsec:Headings"
4998 \begin_layout Standard
4999 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5001 takes care of the numbering for you.
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5006 \begin_inset Index idx
5009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5010 Section headings ! Numbered
5018 \begin_layout Standard
5019 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5023 \begin_layout Enumerate
5029 \begin_layout Enumerate
5035 \begin_layout Enumerate
5041 \begin_layout Enumerate
5047 \begin_layout Enumerate
5053 \begin_layout Enumerate
5059 \begin_layout Enumerate
5065 \begin_layout Standard
5067 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5068 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5069 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5072 \begin_layout Standard
5073 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5074 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5075 You group the book into chapters.
5077 does a similar grouping:
5080 \begin_layout Itemize
5085 is divided into either
5096 \begin_layout Itemize
5108 \begin_layout Itemize
5120 \begin_layout Itemize
5132 \begin_layout Itemize
5144 \begin_layout Itemize
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5165 Not all document types use the
5169 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5174 is the top-level heading.
5182 \begin_layout Standard
5187 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5188 labels it with its number,
5189 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5191 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5205 \begin_inset Index idx
5208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5209 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5217 \begin_layout Standard
5218 The unnumbered section headings have a
5219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5226 at the end of their name.
5227 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5228 the table of contents, see section
5229 \begin_inset space ~
5233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5243 Changing the Numbering
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5246 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5253 \begin_layout Standard
5254 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5255 in the Table of Contents.
5256 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5258 Just as certain classes start with
5272 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5282 This is something you can change.
5285 \begin_layout Standard
5288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5292 \begin_inset Index idx
5295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5304 \begin_inset space ~
5308 \begin_inset space ~
5313 you will see two counters.
5318 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5319 numbers a section heading.
5320 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5325 Short Titles of Headings
5326 \begin_inset Index idx
5329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5330 Section headings ! Short titles
5336 \begin_inset Argument 1
5339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5348 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5355 \begin_layout Standard
5356 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5357 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5358 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5359 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5362 \begin_layout Standard
5364 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5365 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5366 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5367 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5372 \begin_inset space ~
5378 This will insert a box labeled
5379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5383 \begin_inset space ~
5387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5390 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5391 This also works for captions inside floats.
5392 There can only be one short title per title.
5395 \begin_layout Standard
5396 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5403 \begin_layout Standard
5404 The following information applies to all section headings:
5407 \begin_layout Itemize
5408 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5419 \begin_layout Itemize
5420 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5423 \begin_layout Subsection
5427 \begin_layout Standard
5429 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5443 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5444 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5445 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5446 the text they contain.
5447 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5455 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5458 \begin_layout Standard
5459 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5468 when you start a new paragraph.
5469 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5473 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5474 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5475 have to change back to the
5479 environment yourself.
5482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5491 \begin_inset Index idx
5494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5505 time for the differences.
5514 are identical except for one difference:
5518 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5527 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5530 \begin_layout Standard
5531 Here's an example of the
5544 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5546 See – no indentation!
5550 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5551 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5552 the other paragraph.
5555 \begin_layout Standard
5556 Here's another example, this time in the
5563 \begin_layout Quotation
5569 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5570 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5571 the first line, then
5575 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5579 you were quoting other text.
5582 \begin_layout Quotation
5583 Here's a new paragraph.
5584 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5585 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5588 \begin_layout Standard
5589 As the examples show,
5593 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5594 They should put quotes in the
5599 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5603 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5606 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5608 \begin_inset Index idx
5611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5618 \begin_inset Index idx
5621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5637 \begin_layout Standard
5642 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5648 \begin_inset Newline newline
5651 Which I did not rehearse!
5655 It could be much worse.
5656 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5658 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5659 indented a bit more than the first.
5660 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5666 \begin_inset Newline newline
5669 And make things look fine
5670 \begin_inset Newline newline
5676 arg "newline-insert newline"
5682 \begin_layout Standard
5687 does not indent both margins.
5688 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5689 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5692 arg "newline-insert newline"
5698 \begin_layout Subsection
5700 \begin_inset Index idx
5703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5719 \begin_layout Standard
5721 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5731 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5732 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5741 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5742 lets you provide your own label.
5743 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5744 describing some general features of all four of them.
5747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5751 \begin_layout Standard
5752 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5754 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5755 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5764 reset the environment to
5768 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5769 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5770 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5774 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5778 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5786 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5787 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5788 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5790 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5791 you read all of section
5792 \begin_inset space ~
5796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5798 reference "sec:Nesting"
5805 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5807 \begin_inset Index idx
5810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5826 \begin_layout Standard
5827 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5831 paragraph environment.
5832 It has the following properties:
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5836 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5840 \begin_layout Itemize
5842 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5845 \begin_layout Itemize
5846 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 The items can have any length.
5853 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5854 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5866 environment inside another
5870 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5874 \begin_layout Itemize
5875 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5878 \begin_layout Itemize
5880 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5883 \begin_layout Itemize
5885 \begin_inset space ~
5889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5891 reference "sec:Nesting"
5895 for a full explanation of nesting.
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5900 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5909 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5912 \begin_layout Standard
5913 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5914 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5917 \begin_layout Itemize
5918 The label for the first level
5922 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5926 \begin_layout Itemize
5927 The label for the second level is a dash.
5931 \begin_layout Itemize
5932 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5936 \begin_layout Itemize
5937 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5941 \begin_layout Itemize
5942 Back out to the third level.
5946 \begin_layout Itemize
5947 Back to the second level.
5951 \begin_layout Itemize
5952 Back to the outermost level.
5955 \begin_layout Standard
5956 These are the default labels for an
5961 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5966 dialog in the submenu
5971 \begin_inset Index idx
5974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5980 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5985 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5986 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5988 \begin_inset space ~
5992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5994 reference "sec:Nesting"
6001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6003 \begin_inset Index idx
6006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6015 name "sec:Enumerate"
6022 \begin_layout Standard
6027 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6028 It has these properties:
6031 \begin_layout Enumerate
6032 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6036 \begin_layout Enumerate
6037 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6041 \begin_layout Enumerate
6043 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6046 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 environment resets the counter to one.
6054 \begin_layout Enumerate
6067 \begin_layout Enumerate
6068 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6069 Items can have any length.
6072 \begin_layout Enumerate
6073 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6080 \begin_layout Enumerate
6081 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6085 \begin_layout Standard
6094 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6096 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6097 labels the four different levels in an
6104 \begin_layout Enumerate
6105 The first level of an
6109 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6113 \begin_layout Enumerate
6114 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6118 \begin_layout Enumerate
6119 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6127 \begin_layout Enumerate
6128 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6133 \begin_layout Enumerate
6134 Back to the third level
6138 \begin_layout Enumerate
6139 Back to the second level.
6143 \begin_layout Enumerate
6144 Back to the outermost level.
6147 \begin_layout Standard
6148 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6152 environment, see section
6153 \begin_inset space ~
6157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6159 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6164 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6168 \begin_layout Standard
6169 There is more to nesting
6173 environments than we've stated here.
6174 You should read section
6175 \begin_inset space ~
6179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6181 reference "sec:Nesting"
6185 to learn more about nesting.
6188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6190 \begin_inset Index idx
6193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6203 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6207 list has no fixed label.
6208 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6217 of the first line as the label.
6221 \begin_layout Description
6222 Example: This is an example of the
6229 \begin_layout Standard
6231 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6235 \begin_layout Standard
6237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6244 it is meant that the first usage of the
6248 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6250 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6258 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6266 \begin_inset space ~
6272 \begin_inset space ~
6276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6278 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6282 for more information.) Here is an example:
6285 \begin_layout Description
6287 \begin_inset space ~
6290 Example: This one shows how to use a
6293 \begin_inset space ~
6305 \begin_layout Description
6306 Usage: You should use the
6310 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6311 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6313 It's not a good idea to use a
6317 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6318 You're better off using
6330 paragraphs into them.
6333 \begin_layout Description
6334 Nesting: You can nest
6338 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6342 \begin_layout Standard
6343 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6344 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6345 them from the first line.
6348 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6350 \begin_inset Index idx
6353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6362 \begin_layout Standard
6367 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6368 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6372 \begin_layout Standard
6381 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6383 Here are its properties:
6386 \begin_layout Labeling
6387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6389 \begin_inset space ~
6392 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6401 of each line as the item label.
6406 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6407 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6408 space as described above.
6411 \begin_layout Labeling
6412 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6413 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6414 uses different margins for the item label and the
6415 body of the item text.
6416 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6417 label width plus a little extra space.
6421 \begin_layout Labeling
6422 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6424 \begin_inset space ~
6427 width \SpecialChar LyX
6428 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6429 If the label width is larger, the label
6430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6437 into the first line.
6438 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6439 margin of the rest of the item text.
6442 \begin_layout Labeling
6443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6445 \begin_inset space ~
6448 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6453 environment has the same left margin.
6454 \begin_inset Newline newline
6457 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6460 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6462 \begin_inset space ~
6467 dialog (toolbar button
6470 arg "layout-paragraph"
6477 \begin_inset space ~
6482 determines the default label width.
6483 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6492 multiple times instead.
6493 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6503 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6506 \begin_inset space ~
6511 every time you alter a label in a
6516 \begin_inset Newline newline
6519 The predefined default width is the length of
6520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6528 \begin_inset space ~
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6539 list the same way as the
6543 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6549 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6553 \begin_layout Standard
6558 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6559 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6561 \begin_inset space ~
6565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6567 reference "sec:Nesting"
6571 to learn about nesting.
6574 \begin_layout Standard
6575 There is yet another feature of the
6579 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6580 left-justifies the item labels by
6582 You can use additional
6586 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6587 justifies the item label.
6592 are documented in section
6593 \begin_inset space ~
6597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6599 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6604 Here are some examples:
6607 \begin_layout Labeling
6608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6609 Left The default for
6616 \begin_layout Labeling
6617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6618 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6625 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6628 \begin_layout Labeling
6629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6630 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6634 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6641 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6644 \begin_layout Subsection
6646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6648 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6653 \begin_inset Index idx
6656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 \begin_layout Standard
6666 The features described in this section require that the module
6668 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6670 is loaded in the document settings.
6671 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6677 \begin_inset Index idx
6680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6691 Custom Enumerate Lists
6692 \begin_inset Index idx
6695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6696 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6704 \begin_layout Standard
6706 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6712 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6713 There you add the command
6716 \begin_layout Standard
6724 \begin_layout Standard
6736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6737 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6738 Code, look at section
6739 \begin_inset space ~
6743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6745 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6758 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6765 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6766 For capital Roman numerals replace
6778 in the command above.
6779 For Arabic numerals use
6787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6794 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6811 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6819 You can only number 26
6820 \begin_inset space ~
6823 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6831 \begin_layout Standard
6832 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6833 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6836 \begin_layout Standard
6837 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6840 \begin_layout Enumerate
6841 \begin_inset Argument 1
6844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 \begin_layout Enumerate
6871 \begin_inset Argument 1
6874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6897 \begin_layout Enumerate
6902 \begin_layout Enumerate
6903 \begin_inset Argument 1
6906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6930 \begin_layout Enumerate
6931 \begin_inset Argument 1
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6961 For this list these commands were used:
6964 \begin_layout Standard
6975 \begin_inset Newline newline
6983 \begin_inset Newline newline
6991 \begin_inset Newline newline
7001 \begin_layout Standard
7008 makes the label emphasized and
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7018 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7026 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7027 lists until you change the definition.
7035 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7037 \begin_inset Index idx
7040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7041 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7049 \begin_layout Standard
7050 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7053 \begin_layout Enumerate
7054 \begin_inset Argument 1
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 \begin_inset Note Note
7079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 goes back to default numbering
7088 \begin_layout Enumerate
7092 \begin_layout Standard
7096 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7100 \begin_layout Standard
7101 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7106 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7107 to indicate that it is a resumed
7108 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7109 , but in the output.
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7121 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7131 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7133 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7134 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7135 of a normal enumeration.
7136 There, insert the command
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7150 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7154 \begin_layout Enumerate
7158 \begin_layout Enumerate
7162 \begin_layout Standard
7163 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7166 \begin_layout Enumerate
7167 \begin_inset Argument 1
7170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 This enumeration starts at 4
7189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7191 \begin_inset Index idx
7194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7203 \begin_layout Standard
7204 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7206 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7209 \begin_layout Itemize
7213 \begin_layout Itemize
7214 with standard spacing
7217 \begin_layout Standard
7218 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7220 Add there the command
7224 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7227 \begin_layout Itemize
7228 \begin_inset Argument 1
7231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7250 \begin_layout Itemize
7254 \begin_layout Itemize
7258 \begin_layout Standard
7259 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7266 \begin_inset Index idx
7269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7277 For more information see its documentation,
7278 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7288 \begin_layout Standard
7289 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7291 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7292 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7296 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7299 \begin_layout Enumerate
7300 \begin_inset Argument 1
7303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7324 \begin_layout Enumerate
7325 with negative indentation
7328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7329 Further Customization
7330 \begin_inset Index idx
7333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7334 Lists ! Customization
7342 \begin_layout Standard
7343 You can also change the style of description lists.
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7354 changes the description label font, the command
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7364 sets the list style.
7367 \begin_layout Standard
7368 An example where the command
7371 \begin_layout Standard
7376 itshape, style=nextline
7379 \begin_layout Standard
7383 \begin_layout Description
7385 \begin_inset space ~
7389 \begin_inset Argument 1
7392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7398 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7400 itshape, style=nextline
7410 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7411 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7415 \begin_layout Description
7417 \begin_inset space ~
7420 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7421 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7422 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7425 \begin_layout Standard
7426 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7432 \begin_inset Index idx
7435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7443 For more information see its documentation
7444 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7454 \begin_layout Subsection
7456 \begin_inset Index idx
7459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7470 \begin_inset space ~
7473 Address: An Overview
7476 \begin_layout Standard
7477 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7478 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7486 \begin_inset space ~
7492 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7493 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7494 gags on the document.
7495 In contrast, you can use the
7502 \begin_inset space ~
7507 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7508 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7512 \begin_layout Standard
7513 Of course, you're not limited to using
7520 \begin_inset space ~
7529 \begin_inset space ~
7534 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7535 some European academic papers.
7538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7542 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7549 \begin_layout Standard
7554 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7555 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7559 \begin_inset space ~
7564 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7565 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7566 Here's an example of each:
7569 \begin_layout Right Address
7571 \begin_inset Newline newline
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 \begin_inset Newline newline
7582 When is it? What is today?
7585 \begin_layout Standard
7589 \begin_inset space ~
7595 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7597 the largest block of text on a single line.
7598 Here's an example of the
7605 \begin_layout Address
7607 \begin_inset Newline newline
7610 Where do I send this
7611 \begin_inset Newline newline
7614 Your post office and country
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7618 As you can see, both
7625 \begin_inset space ~
7630 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7635 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7636 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7642 This makes sense, since
7650 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7651 Thus, you have to use
7658 arg "newline-insert newline"
7663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7670 \begin_inset space ~
7675 ) to start a new line in an
7682 \begin_inset space ~
7690 \begin_layout Subsection
7694 \begin_layout Standard
7695 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7696 or list of references.
7698 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7701 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7703 \begin_inset Index idx
7706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7715 \begin_layout Standard
7720 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7721 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7722 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7723 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7737 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7738 The book document classes ignores the
7742 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7746 in a letter document class.
7749 \begin_layout Standard
7754 environment does several things for you.
7755 First, it puts the centered label
7756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7764 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7766 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7767 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7768 the subsequent text.
7769 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7771 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7775 \begin_layout Standard
7776 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7780 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7781 The new paragraph will still be in the
7786 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7787 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7790 \begin_layout Standard
7791 \begin_inset Float figure
7796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7798 \begin_inset Graphics
7799 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7812 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7833 \begin_layout Standard
7834 We would love to demonstrate the
7838 environment, but since this document is in the
7839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7846 class, we can't do this.
7847 We inserted it therefore as figure
7848 \begin_inset space ~
7852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7854 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7859 If you have never heard of an
7860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7867 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7870 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7872 \begin_inset Index idx
7875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7884 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7896 environment is used to list references.
7897 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7898 only use it at the end of the document.
7910 \begin_layout Standard
7911 When you first open a
7915 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7916 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7932 depending on the document class.
7933 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7934 Each paragraph of the
7938 environment is a bibliography entry.
7943 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7944 Each new paragraph is still in the
7951 \begin_layout Standard
7952 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7953 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7955 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7957 handling, have a look at section
7958 \begin_inset space ~
7962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7964 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7971 \begin_layout Subsection
7972 Special Environments
7975 \begin_layout Standard
7977 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7978 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7986 \begin_inset Index idx
7989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7999 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8006 \begin_layout Standard
8012 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8014 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8019 key as a fixed whitespace.
8023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8036 \begin_inset space ~
8041 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8059 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8062 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8065 arg "newline-insert newline"
8082 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8083 So, when you finish using the
8088 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8089 Also, you can nest the
8094 environment inside of others.
8097 \begin_layout Standard
8098 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8101 \begin_layout Itemize
8105 arg "newline-insert newline"
8108 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8113 \begin_inset space \space{}
8123 arg "newline-insert newline"
8129 \begin_layout Itemize
8133 arg "newline-insert newline"
8143 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8149 \begin_layout Itemize
8150 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8151 You must put at least one
8155 in any line you want blank.
8156 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8160 \begin_layout Itemize
8161 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8165 since that will insert
8170 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8173 arg "self-insert \""
8179 \begin_layout Standard
8183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8199 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8200 printf("Hello World!
8205 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8209 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8213 \begin_layout Standard
8214 This is just the standard
8215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8226 \begin_layout Standard
8232 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8234 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8235 as if you used a typewriter.
8236 \begin_inset Index idx
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8240 Paragraph environments|)
8245 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8248 Program Code Listings
8253 \begin_inset space ~
8261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8265 \begin_inset Index idx
8268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8277 \begin_layout Standard
8282 environment is similar to the
8287 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8288 computer console text.
8293 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8307 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8308 you can have empty lines.
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 have a certain language and a text style
8325 \begin_layout Itemize
8326 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8327 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8328 and \SpecialChar TeX
8332 \begin_layout Standard
8333 Because of these properties
8337 works like a typewriter.
8341 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 \begin_layout Verbatim
8348 The following 2 lines are empty:
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 \begin_layout Verbatim
8360 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8365 \begin_layout Standard
8370 environment is identical to
8374 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8375 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8382 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8386 \begin_layout Section
8387 Nesting Environments
8388 \begin_inset Index idx
8391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8392 Nesting ! Environments
8398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8407 \begin_layout Subsection
8411 \begin_layout Standard
8413 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8415 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8417 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8419 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8431 \begin_layout Enumerate
8435 \begin_layout Enumerate
8440 \begin_layout Enumerate
8444 \begin_layout Enumerate
8449 \begin_layout Enumerate
8453 \begin_layout Standard
8454 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8455 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8459 \begin_inset space ~
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset space ~
8475 \begin_inset space ~
8480 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8482 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8485 arg "depth-increment"
8491 arg "depth-decrement"
8505 arg "depth-increment"
8511 arg "depth-decrement"
8515 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8516 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8522 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8523 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8524 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8525 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8528 \begin_layout Standard
8529 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8531 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8533 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8536 \begin_layout Subsection
8537 What You Can and Can't Nest
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8542 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8545 \begin_layout Standard
8546 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8547 than a simple yes or no.
8548 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8552 Completely unnestable
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8556 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8561 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8565 \begin_layout Standard
8566 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8567 environments have them:
8570 \begin_layout Description
8571 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8572 Can't nest into them.
8576 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Itemize
8588 \begin_layout Itemize
8594 \begin_layout Itemize
8600 \begin_layout Itemize
8607 \begin_layout Description
8609 \begin_inset space ~
8612 Nestable You can nest them.
8613 You can nest other things into them.
8617 \begin_layout Itemize
8623 \begin_layout Itemize
8629 \begin_layout Itemize
8635 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8653 \begin_layout Itemize
8659 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Description
8680 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8681 You can't nest anything into them.
8685 \begin_layout Itemize
8691 \begin_layout Itemize
8697 \begin_layout Itemize
8703 \begin_layout Itemize
8709 \begin_layout Itemize
8715 \begin_layout Itemize
8721 \begin_layout Itemize
8727 \begin_layout Itemize
8733 \begin_layout Itemize
8739 \begin_layout Itemize
8745 \begin_layout Itemize
8751 \begin_layout Itemize
8757 \begin_layout Itemize
8763 \begin_layout Itemize
8767 \begin_inset space ~
8773 \begin_layout Itemize
8780 \begin_layout Standard
8781 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8789 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8799 \begin_inset space ~
8802 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8803 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8804 nested section headings violate this.
8812 \begin_layout Subsection
8813 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8814 \begin_inset Index idx
8817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8818 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8826 \begin_layout Standard
8827 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8828 affected by nesting anyhow.
8832 \begin_layout Itemize
8836 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Itemize
8844 \begin_layout Standard
8846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8854 Figures and tables in
8858 are not affected by this.
8863 Have a look at section
8864 \begin_inset space ~
8868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8870 reference "sec:Floats"
8874 for more information about
8881 \begin_layout Standard
8883 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8884 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8888 \begin_layout Standard
8889 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8897 of its own, it behaves just like a
8898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8905 paragraph environment.
8906 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8910 \begin_layout Standard
8911 Here's an example with a table:
8914 \begin_layout Enumerate
8919 \begin_layout Enumerate
8920 This is (a) and it's nested.
8924 \begin_layout Standard
8925 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8931 \begin_layout Standard
8933 \begin_inset Tabular
8934 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8935 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8936 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9021 \begin_layout Standard
9022 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9029 \begin_layout Enumerate
9031 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9035 \begin_layout Enumerate
9039 \begin_layout Standard
9040 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9043 \begin_layout Enumerate
9048 \begin_layout Enumerate
9049 This is (a) and it's nested.
9053 \begin_layout Standard
9054 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9060 \begin_layout Standard
9062 \begin_inset Tabular
9063 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9064 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9150 \begin_layout Standard
9151 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9157 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9167 \begin_layout Enumerate
9171 \begin_layout Standard
9172 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9176 \begin_layout Standard
9177 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9180 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 This is (a) and it's nested.
9192 \begin_layout Standard
9193 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9199 \begin_layout Standard
9201 \begin_inset Tabular
9202 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9203 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9290 \begin_layout Standard
9291 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9297 \begin_layout Enumerate
9299 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9306 \begin_layout Enumerate
9310 \begin_layout Standard
9311 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9317 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9318 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9322 \begin_layout Subsection
9323 Usage and General Features
9326 \begin_layout Standard
9327 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9328 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9337 is the innermost possible depth.
9338 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9341 \begin_layout Enumerate
9342 level #1 – outermost
9346 \begin_layout Enumerate
9351 \begin_layout Enumerate
9356 \begin_layout Enumerate
9361 \begin_layout Itemize
9366 \begin_layout Itemize
9375 \begin_layout Standard
9376 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9377 both of them in the example.
9378 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9388 For example, if we tried to nest another
9393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9400 , we would get errors.
9403 \begin_layout Subsection
9405 \begin_inset Index idx
9408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9417 \begin_layout Standard
9418 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9419 We have several examples of nested environments.
9420 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9425 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9428 \begin_layout Labeling
9429 \labelwidthstring MMM
9430 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9439 \begin_layout Labeling
9440 \labelwidthstring MMM
9441 #2-a This is level #2.
9442 We created it by using
9445 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9451 arg "depth-increment"
9458 \begin_layout Labeling
9459 \labelwidthstring MMM
9460 #3-a This is level #3.
9461 This time, we just enter
9468 arg "depth-increment"
9472 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9476 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9482 arg "depth-increment"
9489 \begin_layout Standard
9494 environment, nested inside of
9495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9503 So, it's at level #4.
9504 We did this by entering
9507 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9513 arg "depth-increment"
9516 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9521 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9537 \begin_layout Standard
9542 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9545 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9551 \begin_layout Labeling
9552 \labelwidthstring MMM
9553 #4-a This is level #4.
9557 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9560 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9565 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9569 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9574 keep nesting things inside
9575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9586 \begin_layout Labeling
9587 \labelwidthstring MMM
9588 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9593 \begin_layout Labeling
9594 \labelwidthstring MMM
9595 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9596 and this is level #6.
9597 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9601 \begin_layout Labeling
9602 \labelwidthstring MMM
9603 #5-b Back to level #5.
9607 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9613 arg "depth-decrement"
9620 \begin_layout Labeling
9621 \labelwidthstring MMM
9625 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9631 arg "depth-decrement"
9634 , we're back at level #4.
9638 \begin_layout Labeling
9639 \labelwidthstring MMM
9640 #3-b Back to level #3.
9641 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9645 \begin_layout Labeling
9646 \labelwidthstring MMM
9647 #2-b Back to level #2.
9652 \begin_layout Labeling
9653 \labelwidthstring MMM
9654 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9655 After this sentence, we will enter
9659 and change the paragraph environment back to
9666 \begin_layout Standard
9667 We could have also used the
9683 environment in place of the
9688 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9691 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9692 Example 2: Inheritance
9695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9696 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9708 arg "depth-increment"
9712 \begin_inset Newline newline
9715 which, we will change to the
9723 \begin_layout Enumerate
9728 environment, at level #2.
9731 \begin_layout Enumerate
9732 Notice how the nested
9736 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9740 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9744 \begin_layout Standard
9745 We ended this example by entering
9750 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9754 and reset the nesting depth by using
9757 arg "depth-decrement"
9763 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9764 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9773 \begin_inset Argument 1
9776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9777 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9785 \begin_layout Enumerate
9786 This is level #1, in an
9790 paragraph environment.
9791 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9795 \begin_layout Enumerate
9800 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9806 arg "depth-increment"
9810 Now, what happens if we nest an
9814 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9815 label be? An asterisk?
9819 \begin_layout Itemize
9829 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9830 So, its label is a bullet.
9831 (We got here by using
9834 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9840 arg "depth-increment"
9843 , then changing the environment to
9851 \begin_layout Itemize
9852 Here's level #4, produced using
9855 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9861 arg "depth-increment"
9865 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9870 \begin_layout Enumerate
9873 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9878 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9882 , because we are in the
9890 environment (that is, it is an
9905 \begin_layout Enumerate
9910 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9911 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9915 \begin_layout Enumerate
9916 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9919 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9922 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9925 \begin_layout Enumerate
9929 arg "depth-decrement"
9932 to decrease the depth after the next
9935 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9942 \begin_layout Enumerate
9944 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9949 \begin_layout Enumerate
9951 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9952 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9956 \begin_layout Enumerate
9957 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9966 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9971 reset the counter for the label.
9975 \begin_layout Enumerate
9979 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9985 arg "depth-decrement"
9988 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9989 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9990 into the twofold-nested
9998 \begin_layout Enumerate
9999 The same thing happens if we do another
10002 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10008 arg "depth-decrement"
10011 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10014 \begin_layout Standard
10015 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10020 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10031 The number of other
10035 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10042 The same rule applies for the
10046 environment, as well.
10049 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10050 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10053 \begin_layout Enumerate
10054 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10055 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10056 the same detail with how we did it.
10065 \begin_layout Standard
10073 arg "depth-increment"
10080 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10081 the example in parentheses someplace.
10082 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10083 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10084 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10088 \begin_layout Enumerate
10093 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10097 \begin_layout Verse
10098 Now we will add verse.
10099 \begin_inset Newline newline
10102 It will get much worse.
10103 \begin_inset Newline newline
10113 arg "depth-increment"
10123 \begin_layout Verse
10124 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10125 \begin_inset Newline newline
10128 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10129 \begin_inset Newline newline
10135 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10143 \begin_layout Verse
10144 Here comes a table:
10148 \begin_layout Standard
10149 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10155 \begin_layout Standard
10157 \begin_inset Tabular
10158 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10159 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10246 \begin_layout Verse
10250 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10260 arg "depth-increment"
10266 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10272 \begin_inset Newline newline
10280 arg "depth-decrement"
10287 \begin_layout Enumerate
10292 : level #1) This is another item.
10293 Note that selecting a
10297 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10298 3 times to put the table inside the
10306 \begin_layout Quotation
10307 We're now ending the
10311 list and changing to
10316 We're still at level #1.
10317 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10318 The next set of paragraphs is a
10319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10326 We will nest both the
10333 \begin_inset space ~
10338 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10342 for the letter body.
10346 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10349 to preserve the depth.
10350 Remember that you need to use
10353 arg "newline-insert newline"
10356 to create multiple lines inside the
10363 \begin_inset space ~
10373 \begin_layout Right Address
10375 \begin_inset Newline newline
10378 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10379 \begin_inset Newline newline
10385 \begin_layout Address
10387 \begin_inset space ~
10393 \begin_layout Quotation
10394 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10398 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10399 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10400 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10401 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10402 as soon as possible.
10403 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10406 \begin_layout Quotation
10407 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10408 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10409 with your order, along with payment.
10412 \begin_layout Quotation
10413 We thank you again for your patience.
10416 \begin_layout Address
10418 \begin_inset Newline newline
10425 \begin_layout Quotation
10426 That ends that example!
10429 \begin_layout Standard
10430 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10431 gives you a lot of power with just
10433 We could have easily nested an
10454 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10457 \begin_layout Subsection
10459 \begin_inset Index idx
10462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10463 Nesting ! Separation
10469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10471 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10478 \begin_layout Standard
10479 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10481 For example you need two different enumerations:
10484 \begin_layout Enumerate
10489 \begin_layout Enumerate
10494 \begin_layout Enumerate
10498 \begin_layout Standard
10499 \begin_inset Separator plain
10505 \begin_layout Itemize
10511 \begin_layout Standard
10512 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10518 \begin_layout Enumerate
10522 \begin_layout Enumerate
10526 \begin_layout Enumerate
10530 \begin_layout Standard
10531 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10532 list item and use the menu
10534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10535 Separated <Name> Above
10539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10540 Separated <Name> Below
10543 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10544 ) and before or behind it the
10546 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10549 \begin_layout Standard
10550 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10551 (red arrow in LyX).
10552 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10553 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10556 \begin_layout Standard
10557 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10560 arg "paragraph-break"
10567 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10570 \begin_layout Section
10571 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10572 \begin_inset Index idx
10575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10584 \begin_layout Standard
10585 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10586 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10588 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10589 be broken at the end of a line.
10590 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10594 \begin_layout Subsection
10596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10598 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10603 \begin_inset Index idx
10606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10615 \begin_layout Standard
10616 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10617 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10618 ) not to break the line at
10620 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10623 \begin_layout Quote
10624 Further documentation is given in section
10625 \begin_inset Newline newline
10629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10631 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10639 \begin_layout Standard
10640 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10655 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10664 A protected space is set with
10666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10669 \begin_inset space ~
10677 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10683 \begin_layout Subsection
10685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10687 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10692 \begin_inset Index idx
10695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10696 Spacing ! Horizontal
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10708 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10712 The length units are listed in Appendix
10713 \begin_inset space ~
10717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10719 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10730 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10735 \begin_inset Index idx
10738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10739 Spaces ! Inter-word
10747 \begin_layout Standard
10748 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10749 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10750 at the ends of sentences.
10751 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10752 automatically takes care about this.
10753 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10754 followed by a period; see section
10755 \begin_inset space ~
10759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10761 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10766 To insert a normal space, select
10768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10771 \begin_inset space ~
10779 arg "space-insert normal"
10785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10789 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10794 \begin_inset Index idx
10797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10806 \begin_layout Standard
10808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10815 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10824 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10825 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10826 inside abbreviations:
10829 \begin_layout Quote
10831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10838 \begin_layout Standard
10839 or between values and units.
10840 Compare for example this:
10841 \begin_inset Newline newline
10845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10849 \begin_inset Newline newline
10852 10 kg (normal space
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10856 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10869 arg "space-insert thin"
10875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10879 \begin_layout Standard
10880 You can also insert the following space types:
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10892 space A line with a
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10897 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10904 negative thin space between the arrows.
10907 \begin_layout Description
10909 \begin_inset space ~
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10916 space A line with a
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10921 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10928 negative medium space between the arrows.
10931 \begin_layout Description
10933 \begin_inset space ~
10937 \begin_inset space ~
10940 space A line with a
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10945 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10952 negative thick space between the arrows.
10955 \begin_layout Description
10957 \begin_inset space ~
10961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10965 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10969 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10977 \begin_inset space ~
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10984 em) space between the arrows.
10987 \begin_layout Description
10989 \begin_inset space ~
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11001 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11009 \begin_inset space ~
11013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11016 em) space between the arrows.
11019 \begin_layout Description
11021 \begin_inset space ~
11025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11029 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11033 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11037 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11041 \begin_inset space ~
11045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11048 em) space between the arrows.
11051 \begin_layout Description
11053 \begin_inset space ~
11057 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11061 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11066 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11073 cm space between the arrows.
11076 \begin_layout Standard
11078 \begin_inset space ~
11082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11084 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11088 lists the different space sizes.
11091 \begin_layout Standard
11092 \begin_inset Float table
11097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11098 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11103 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11107 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11117 \begin_inset Tabular
11118 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11119 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11237 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11396 \begin_inset Index idx
11399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11408 \begin_layout Standard
11409 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11410 feature for adding extra space
11411 in a uniform fashion.
11412 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11413 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11414 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11415 equally between themselves.
11418 \begin_layout Standard
11419 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11422 \begin_layout Quote
11424 This is on the left side
11425 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11428 This is on the right
11431 \begin_layout Quote
11434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11444 \begin_layout Quote
11447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11451 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11461 \begin_layout Standard
11462 That was an example in the
11468 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11472 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11476 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11479 is one in a standard paragraph.
11480 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11484 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11488 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11491 \begin_inset space ~
11496 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11537 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11541 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11549 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11553 \begin_inset space ~
11559 \begin_layout Standard
11561 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11565 \begin_inset space ~
11571 \begin_layout Standard
11572 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11580 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11584 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11586 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11587 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11591 option in the space dialog.
11599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11603 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11608 \begin_inset Index idx
11611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11620 \begin_layout Standard
11621 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11622 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11625 \begin_layout Standard
11626 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11629 What is correct English?:
11630 \begin_inset Newline newline
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
11638 \begin_inset space ~
11641 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11642 \begin_inset Newline newline
11646 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11657 \begin_inset Newline newline
11661 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11672 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11678 \begin_layout Standard
11680 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11685 \begin_inset space ~
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11697 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11700 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11704 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11710 \begin_inset space ~
11714 \begin_inset space ~
11718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11721 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11730 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11731 That is why it is named
11732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11740 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11741 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11745 \begin_layout Subsection
11747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11749 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11754 \begin_inset Index idx
11757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11766 \begin_layout Standard
11767 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11772 \begin_inset space ~
11778 There you find the following sizes:
11781 \begin_layout Standard
11794 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11795 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11800 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11802 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 \begin_inset space ~
11811 \begin_inset Index idx
11814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11815 Document ! Settings
11820 for the paragraph separation.
11821 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11832 \begin_layout Standard
11838 \begin_inset Index idx
11841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11847 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11848 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11853 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11854 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11863 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11872 s are described in section
11873 \begin_inset space ~
11877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11879 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11888 If there are several
11892 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11893 You can therefore use
11897 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11900 \begin_layout Standard
11905 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11906 \begin_inset space ~
11910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11912 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11919 \begin_layout Standard
11920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11930 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11931 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11943 \begin_layout Subsection
11944 Paragraph Alignment
11945 \begin_inset Index idx
11948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11949 Paragraph ! Alignment
11957 \begin_layout Standard
11958 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11960 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11963 dialog (toolbar button
11966 arg "layout-paragraph"
11970 There are five possibilities:
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11981 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11987 \begin_layout Itemize
11995 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12001 \begin_layout Itemize
12009 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12015 \begin_layout Itemize
12023 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12029 \begin_layout Itemize
12037 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12043 \begin_layout Standard
12044 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12045 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12046 the left and right margins.
12047 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12052 This paragraph is right aligned,
12055 \begin_layout Standard
12057 this one is centered,
12060 \begin_layout Standard
12062 this one is left aligned.
12065 \begin_layout Subsection
12067 \begin_inset Index idx
12070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12071 Page breaks ! Forced
12077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12079 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12088 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12089 force a page break where you want one.
12090 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12091 is good at page breaking.
12092 Only if you use a lot of
12096 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12097 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12100 \begin_layout Standard
12101 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12102 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12106 have to change the page breaking.
12109 \begin_layout Standard
12110 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12112 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 \begin_inset space ~
12123 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 \begin_inset space ~
12133 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12135 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12136 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12139 \begin_layout Standard
12140 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12141 at the top of a page.
12142 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12144 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12145 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12146 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12150 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12154 to learn more about
12161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12165 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12170 \begin_inset Index idx
12173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12174 Page breaks ! Clear
12182 \begin_layout Standard
12183 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12184 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12185 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12186 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12187 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12190 \begin_layout Standard
12191 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 \begin_inset space ~
12202 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 \begin_inset space ~
12211 \begin_inset space ~
12216 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12217 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12220 \begin_layout Subsection
12222 \begin_inset Index idx
12225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12234 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12241 \begin_layout Standard
12242 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12244 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 \begin_inset space ~
12253 \begin_inset space ~
12261 arg "newline-insert newline"
12265 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 \begin_inset space ~
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12282 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12285 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12287 This is useful to avoid
12288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12295 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12298 \begin_layout Standard
12299 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12302 very good at line breaking.
12303 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12304 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12305 \begin_inset space ~
12309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12311 reference "sec:Quote"
12316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12318 reference "sec:Verse"
12323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12325 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12332 \begin_layout Subsection
12334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12336 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12341 \begin_inset Index idx
12344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12353 \begin_layout Standard
12355 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12366 \begin_layout Standard
12370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12373 \begin_inset space ~
12378 you can insert horizontal lines.
12379 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12380 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12381 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12384 \begin_layout Standard
12386 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12397 \begin_layout Section
12398 Characters and Symbols
12401 \begin_layout Standard
12402 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12403 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12404 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12412 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12416 for information on how this is done.
12419 \begin_layout Standard
12420 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12425 dialog via the menu
12427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12428 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12434 \begin_layout Standard
12435 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12443 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12444 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12446 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12454 \begin_layout Section
12455 Fonts and Text Styles
12456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12458 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12465 \begin_layout Subsection
12467 \begin_inset Index idx
12470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12479 \begin_layout Standard
12480 There are two types of fonts:
12483 \begin_layout Description
12485 \begin_inset space ~
12489 \begin_inset Index idx
12492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12498 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12503 characters) in the font.
12504 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12505 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12506 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12507 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12508 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12509 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12510 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12511 \begin_inset Newline newline
12514 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12515 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12516 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12517 sizes than at small ones.
12518 \begin_inset Newline newline
12532 \begin_inset space ~
12540 \begin_layout Description
12542 \begin_inset space ~
12546 \begin_inset Index idx
12549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12555 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12556 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12557 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12558 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12559 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12560 image manipulation program.
12561 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12562 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12566 pixels high up to 34
12567 \begin_inset space ~
12570 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12571 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12572 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12574 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12575 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12576 \begin_inset Newline newline
12579 Bitmap fonts are named
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12587 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12590 \begin_layout Standard
12591 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12592 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12593 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12594 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12595 use scalable fonts.
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12599 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12602 \begin_layout Standard
12603 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12604 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12605 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12606 font to emphasize text, you use an
12607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12615 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12617 In \SpecialChar LyX
12618 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12622 \begin_layout Subsection
12625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12627 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12634 \begin_layout Standard
12635 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12636 used its own fonts.
12637 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12638 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12641 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12642 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12643 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12644 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12645 to a word processor.
12646 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12647 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12648 files are very portable across
12649 different machines.
12650 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 has increased a lot
12652 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12655 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12657 \begin_inset space ~
12661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12663 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12668 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12669 code in the document
12670 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12675 engines that are also able directly
12676 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12678 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12680 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12682 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12683 that is installed on your system.
12684 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12687 \begin_layout Standard
12688 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12696 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12697 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12705 \begin_layout Subsection
12706 Document Font and Font size
12707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12709 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12714 \begin_inset Index idx
12717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12724 \begin_inset Index idx
12727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12736 \begin_layout Standard
12737 You can set the document fonts in the
12739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12743 \begin_inset Index idx
12746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12747 Document ! Settings
12757 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12758 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12770 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12772 \begin_inset space ~
12775 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12778 \begin_layout Standard
12783 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12784 This requires that you use
12796 as the output format, i.
12797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12801 \begin_inset space \space{}
12804 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12805 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12806 installed (see section
12807 \begin_inset space ~
12811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12813 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12818 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12820 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12821 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12823 \begin_inset space ~
12826 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12827 cannot determine the family.
12828 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12829 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12832 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12835 \begin_layout Standard
12836 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12837 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12842 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12848 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12849 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12858 \begin_inset space ~
12864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12889 European Computer Modern
12892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12900 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12903 \begin_layout Standard
12908 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12909 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12914 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12917 \begin_inset space ~
12922 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12928 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12929 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12932 \begin_layout Itemize
12936 \begin_inset space ~
12941 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12954 \begin_inset space ~
12959 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12960 community in order to replace
12964 as the default font.
12965 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12966 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12969 \begin_inset space ~
12982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12983 One difference is improved kerning.
12991 \begin_layout Itemize
12992 If you do not like the look of
13000 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13005 \begin_inset space ~
13011 \begin_inset space ~
13021 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13022 \begin_inset space ~
13025 serif and typewriter fonts,
13029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13030 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13037 \begin_inset space ~
13046 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13051 \begin_inset space \space{}
13059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13063 \begin_inset space \space{}
13069 \begin_inset space ~
13077 \begin_inset space ~
13087 but you can also select your own.
13088 \begin_inset Newline newline
13091 The differences between roman,
13094 \begin_inset space ~
13103 fonts are explained in section
13104 \begin_inset space ~
13108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13110 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13115 \begin_inset Newline newline
13121 \begin_inset space ~
13126 was originally designed for newspapers.
13127 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13128 into the small newspaper columns.
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13137 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13140 \begin_layout Standard
13141 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13154 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13159 depends on the class you are using.
13160 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13163 \begin_layout Standard
13164 Note that the font size is the
13169 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13170 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13171 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13172 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13175 \begin_inset space ~
13181 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13182 \begin_inset space ~
13186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13188 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13195 \begin_layout Standard
13199 \begin_inset space ~
13204 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13209 serif or typewriter.
13214 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13224 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13227 \begin_layout Standard
13232 LaTeX font encoding
13234 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13235 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13241 \begin_inset Index idx
13244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13252 \begin_inset space ~
13256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13258 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13263 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13264 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13271 \begin_layout Standard
13272 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13274 Use Old Style Figures
13278 Use True Small Caps
13281 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13284 Use Old Style Figures
13286 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13288 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13296 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13300 Use True Small Caps
13302 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13303 of scaled capitals.
13304 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13305 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13308 \begin_layout Standard
13313 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13314 a font to display the script characters.
13318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13319 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13325 \begin_inset Index idx
13328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13335 So this has no effect for the document language
13351 \begin_layout Standard
13354 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13356 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13357 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13363 \begin_inset Index idx
13366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13368 packages ! microtype
13377 \begin_layout Standard
13380 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13382 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13387 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13388 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13394 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13401 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13411 \begin_layout Standard
13412 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13416 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13424 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13429 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13430 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13432 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13437 dialog, see section
13438 \begin_inset space ~
13442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13444 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13456 \begin_layout Subsection
13460 \begin_layout Standard
13461 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13462 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13464 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13465 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13466 choose a math font in the dialog
13468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13472 \begin_inset Index idx
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13476 Document ! Settings
13482 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13483 automatically selects a math font.
13484 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13485 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13505 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13506 document font is available.
13509 \begin_layout Standard
13510 Note that the math font will not be used for
13514 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13520 or by the insertion of the command
13527 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13528 \begin_inset space ~
13532 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13533 while the math characters do not.
13535 \begin_inset space ~
13538 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13541 \begin_inset space ~
13549 \begin_inset space ~
13554 in the document font settings.
13557 \begin_layout Standard
13558 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13559 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13560 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13561 font (in most cases
13562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13568 \begin_inset space ~
13574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13577 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13578 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13586 \begin_inset space ~
13592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13598 \begin_layout Subsection
13599 Using Different Character Styles
13600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13602 name "subsec:charstyles"
13607 \begin_inset Index idx
13610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13617 \begin_inset Index idx
13620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13629 \begin_layout Standard
13630 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13631 automatically changes the style for certain paragraph
13633 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13635 This is where we meet the concept of
13642 \begin_layout Standard
13643 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
13644 supports two character styles,
13658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13661 e., available with all document classes.
13662 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13664 custom character styles
13666 for specific purposes.
13667 We describe both types of characters styles in a minute.
13670 \begin_layout Standard
13671 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13681 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13685 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13698 — you customized the
13703 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13704 among them, encourage the use of
13716 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13717 \begin_inset space ~
13721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13723 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13728 Rather than fiddling with
13732 , they encourage the use of
13744 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13749 \begin_inset Quotes els
13753 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13756 ), not their form (
13757 \begin_inset Quotes els
13761 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13765 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13766 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13767 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13768 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13769 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13770 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13776 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13780 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13781 With a semantic markup (such as
13785 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13790 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13792 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13793 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13796 \begin_layout Standard
13797 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic character styles that are
13798 provided by \SpecialChar LyX
13802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13803 Builtin Character Styles
13804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13806 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13814 The two builtin character styles can be activated via the
13818 dialog, key bindings, and the toolbar.
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13826 style, do one of the following:
13829 \begin_layout Itemize
13830 click on the toolbar button
13839 \begin_layout Itemize
13840 use the key binding
13849 \begin_layout Itemize
13857 arg "dialog-show character"
13863 arg "dialog-show character"
13866 ) as described in section
13867 \begin_inset space ~
13871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13873 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13880 \begin_layout Standard
13881 These commands are all toggles.
13886 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13889 \begin_layout Standard
13890 One typically uses the
13894 style for proper names.
13896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13903 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13911 \begin_layout Standard
13916 is producing text in
13920 , but the definition can be changed.
13923 \begin_layout Standard
13924 A more widely used character style is the
13929 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13936 \begin_layout Itemize
13937 clicking on the toolbar button
13946 \begin_layout Itemize
13947 using the keybindings
13956 \begin_layout Itemize
13964 arg "dialog-show character"
13970 arg "dialog-show character"
13973 ) as described in section
13974 \begin_inset space ~
13978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13980 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13987 \begin_layout Standard
13992 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13994 use a different font, and you can also customize it yourself by changing
13995 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13999 \begin_layout Standard
14000 We've been using the
14004 style all over the place in this document.
14005 Here's one more example:
14008 \begin_layout Quotation
14011 Do not overuse character styles!
14014 \begin_layout Standard
14015 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14016 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14017 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14018 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
14022 \begin_layout Standard
14023 In contrast to the custom character styles, the builtin styles are represented
14024 only as font changes and integrated in the
14029 You can therefore always reset to the default font using the key binding
14039 arg "dialog-show character"
14045 arg "dialog-show character"
14051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14052 Custom Character Styles
14053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14055 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14062 \begin_layout Standard
14063 Custom character styles can be provided by the document class, a module
14065 \begin_inset space ~
14069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14071 reference "subsec:Modules"
14078 ), or local layout settings (see section
14079 \begin_inset space ~
14083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14085 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14090 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14094 markup for specific functions.
14095 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14100 module that provides, among other things, some custom character styles
14101 to markup linguistic levels:
14110 \begin_inset Quotes els
14114 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14120 \begin_layout Standard
14121 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14123 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14129 \begin_layout Standard
14130 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14135 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14136 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14137 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14142 appears as normal font change, the custom character style
14143 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14152 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14153 This is the way all custom character styles look and feel like.
14154 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14155 \begin_inset Flex Code
14158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14165 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14175 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14185 Note that custom character styles might (as in the example) or might not
14186 emulate on screen their formal appearance.
14189 \begin_layout Subsection
14190 Tweaking Text Properties with the
14195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14197 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14202 \begin_inset Index idx
14205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14214 \begin_layout Standard
14215 There are always occasions when you will need to do some formal fine-tuning;
14216 so \SpecialChar LyX
14217 gives you a way to customize the properties of text passages.
14218 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14219 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14220 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14221 from ordinary dialog.
14224 \begin_layout Standard
14225 If there are no custom character styles provided by the document class or
14226 a module for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better
14227 way of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly
14228 tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
14233 comes in as a last resort.
14236 \begin_layout Standard
14237 Before we document how to tweak the text properties, we want to issue a
14238 warning yet again: Don't overuse that!
14239 \begin_inset Newline newline
14242 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14243 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14246 \begin_layout Standard
14247 To tweak text properties, open the
14250 arg "dialog-show character"
14253 dialog or press the toolbar button
14256 arg "dialog-show character"
14260 There are several combo boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14261 text property that you can choose.
14262 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14265 \begin_inset space ~
14270 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14275 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14276 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14277 environments all at once.
14280 \begin_layout Standard
14281 The text properties, and their options (in addition to
14284 \begin_inset space ~
14296 \begin_layout Labeling
14297 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14311 The possible options are:
14315 \begin_layout Labeling
14316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14321 This is the Roman font family.
14322 Normally a serif font.
14323 It's also the default family.
14333 \begin_layout Labeling
14334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14338 \begin_inset space ~
14345 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14357 \begin_layout Labeling
14358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14365 This is the Typewriter font family.
14371 arg "font-typewriter"
14379 \begin_layout Standard
14380 The general differences of these families are:
14383 \begin_layout Itemize
14388 fonts use characters with serifs.
14389 These are the small
14390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14397 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14398 The following example shows the difference:
14399 \begin_inset Newline newline
14403 \begin_inset Newline newline
14408 text without serifs
14411 \begin_inset Newline newline
14414 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14415 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14422 \begin_layout Itemize
14427 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14428 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14429 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14432 \begin_layout Itemize
14438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14445 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14463 \begin_inset Newline newline
14467 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14481 \begin_inset Note Note
14484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14485 For more on phantoms see section
14486 \begin_inset space ~
14490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14492 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14502 \begin_inset Newline newline
14509 \begin_layout Labeling
14510 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14515 This corresponds to the print weight.
14520 \begin_layout Labeling
14521 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14526 This is the Medium font series.
14527 It's also the default series.
14530 \begin_layout Labeling
14531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14538 This is the Bold font series.
14551 \begin_layout Labeling
14552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14557 As the name implies.
14562 \begin_layout Labeling
14563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14568 This is the Upright font shape.
14569 It's also the default shape.
14572 \begin_layout Labeling
14573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14584 is the Italic font shape
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14598 This is the Slanted font shape
14600 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14601 , this is different from italic).
14604 \begin_layout Labeling
14605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14609 \begin_inset space ~
14616 This is the Small caps font shape
14623 \begin_layout Labeling
14624 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14629 Alters the text color.
14630 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
14635 , which means that the document default color set in
14637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14638 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14644 \begin_inset space ~
14649 is used, you can select
14726 \begin_inset Index idx
14729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14738 \begin_layout Labeling
14739 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14744 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14745 the language of the document.
14746 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
14747 workarea in blue to
14748 indicate the change.
14749 \begin_inset Newline newline
14752 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14754 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14755 When using the spell checking (see section
14756 \begin_inset space ~
14760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14762 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14766 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14769 \begin_layout Labeling
14770 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14775 Alters the size of the font.
14776 You won't find numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportio
14777 nal to the document font size.
14778 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14779 the details, but a general description of what
14785 \begin_layout Labeling
14786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14807 arg "font-size tiny"
14813 \begin_layout Labeling
14814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14835 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14841 \begin_layout Labeling
14842 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14863 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14869 \begin_layout Labeling
14870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14891 arg "font-size small"
14897 \begin_layout Labeling
14898 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14912 It's also the default size.
14916 arg "font-size normal"
14922 \begin_layout Labeling
14923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14944 arg "font-size large"
14950 \begin_layout Labeling
14951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14972 arg "font-size larger"
14978 \begin_layout Labeling
14979 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15000 arg "font-size largest"
15006 \begin_layout Labeling
15007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15028 arg "font-size huge"
15034 \begin_layout Labeling
15035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15056 arg "font-size giant"
15062 \begin_layout Labeling
15063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15068 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15088 arg "font-size increase"
15094 \begin_layout Labeling
15095 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15100 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15120 arg "font-size decrease"
15127 \begin_layout Standard
15132 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15133 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15135 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15136 — use those instead.
15137 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15140 \begin_layout Labeling
15141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15146 Here you can have text passages being underlined.
15147 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15148 days, when you could not change fonts.
15149 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15150 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15151 because some people
15155 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15160 \begin_layout Labeling
15161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15166 Don't use underlining.
15169 \begin_layout Labeling
15170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15177 This is text with Single underlining on.
15183 arg "font-underline"
15189 \begin_inset Newline newline
15195 \begin_layout Labeling
15196 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15203 This is text with Double underlining on.
15209 arg "font-underunderline"
15215 \begin_layout Labeling
15216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15223 This is text with Wavy underlining on.
15229 arg "font-underwave"
15233 \begin_inset Newline newline
15236 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15237 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15241 \begin_layout Labeling
15242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15247 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15251 \begin_layout Labeling
15252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15257 Don't use strikethrough.
15260 \begin_layout Labeling
15261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15268 This is text with Single strikethrough on.
15274 arg "font-strikeout"
15278 \begin_inset Newline newline
15281 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15282 changed in the meantime.
15285 \begin_layout Labeling
15286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15290 \begin_inset space ~
15297 This is text with /-strikethrough on.
15300 \begin_inset Newline newline
15303 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15307 \begin_layout Standard
15308 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15309 you access to the two builtin semantic character styles (see section
15310 \begin_inset space ~
15314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15316 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15323 \begin_layout Itemize
15330 This is text with emphasize on
15335 \begin_layout Itemize
15342 This is text with Noun on.
15345 \begin_layout Standard
15346 So you have a huge number of combinations to select from.
15347 Once you have applied a text property via the
15350 arg "dialog-show character"
15356 arg "dialog-show character"
15359 ) dialog, the settings are temporarily saved.
15360 You can activate the last applied properties by using the toolbar button
15364 arg "textstyle-apply"
15368 The button lets you apply those even when the dialog isn't visible.
15371 \begin_layout Standard
15372 To completely reset the text properties of a selection to the default, use
15383 \begin_layout Standard
15384 We conclude this section with the same warning once again: Do not overuse
15385 the fonts! They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute
15389 \begin_layout Section
15390 Printing and Previewing
15393 \begin_layout Subsection
15397 \begin_layout Standard
15398 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15399 using \SpecialChar LyX
15400 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15401 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15402 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15403 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15405 Additional Features
15410 \begin_layout Standard
15412 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15415 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15416 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15417 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15420 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15421 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15422 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15423 to turn your writing into printable output.
15424 This happens in two stages:
15427 \begin_layout Enumerate
15428 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15429 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15431 a file with the extension,
15432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15446 \begin_layout Enumerate
15447 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15448 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15449 to use the commands in the
15453 file to produce printable output.
15456 \begin_layout Subsection
15457 Output file formats
15458 \begin_inset Index idx
15461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15468 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15470 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15477 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15478 Simple text (ASCII)
15479 \begin_inset Index idx
15482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15483 File formats ! ASCII
15491 \begin_layout Standard
15492 This file type has the extension
15493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15505 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15509 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15516 \begin_layout Standard
15517 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15519 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15520 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15522 \begin_inset space ~
15528 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15529 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15530 bibliography (section
15531 \begin_inset space ~
15535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15537 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15542 If your document includes such material, use
15544 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15545 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15547 \begin_inset space ~
15551 \begin_inset space ~
15555 \begin_inset space ~
15563 \begin_inset space ~
15567 \begin_inset space ~
15573 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15574 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15580 \begin_inset Index idx
15583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15584 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15593 \begin_layout Standard
15594 This file type has the extension
15595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15606 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15609 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15610 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15611 -Errors or to process it manually
15612 with console commands.
15613 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15614 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15615 's temporary directory whenever you
15616 view or export your document.
15619 \begin_layout Standard
15620 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15621 -file using the menu
15623 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15624 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15628 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15629 export variants are explained in section
15630 \begin_inset space ~
15634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15636 reference "subsec:Export"
15643 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15645 \begin_inset Index idx
15648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15657 \begin_layout Standard
15658 This file type has the extension
15659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15679 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15680 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15681 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15685 \begin_layout Standard
15686 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15687 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15688 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15689 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15690 when you view the DVI.
15691 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15694 \begin_layout Standard
15695 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15697 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15698 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15703 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15704 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15706 \begin_inset space ~
15712 The latter option uses the program
15714 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15720 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15723 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15724 font access (see section
15725 \begin_inset space ~
15729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15731 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15736 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15737 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15744 \begin_inset Index idx
15747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15748 File formats ! PostScript
15756 \begin_layout Standard
15757 This file type has the extension
15758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15770 PostScript was developed by the company
15774 as a printer language.
15775 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15777 PostScript can be seen as a
15778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15781 programming language
15782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15785 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15790 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15797 \begin_inset Index idx
15800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15802 packages ! pstricks
15812 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15815 \begin_layout Standard
15816 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15820 Encapsulated PostScript
15821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15824 (EPS, file extension
15825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15837 As \SpecialChar LyX
15838 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15839 convert them in the background to EPS.
15840 If, for example, you have 50
15841 \begin_inset space ~
15844 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15846 \begin_inset space ~
15849 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15850 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15852 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15853 EPS to avoid this problem.
15856 \begin_layout Standard
15857 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15859 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15860 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15866 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15868 \begin_inset Index idx
15871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15878 \begin_inset Index idx
15881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15890 \begin_layout Standard
15891 This file type has the extension
15892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15908 Portable Document Format
15909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15916 was derived from PostScript.
15917 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15926 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15927 looks exactly the same.
15930 \begin_layout Standard
15931 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15935 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15939 (JPG, file extension
15940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15967 Portable Network Graphics
15968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15971 (PNG, file extension
15972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15984 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15985 converts them in the
15986 background to one of these formats.
15987 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15988 will slow down your workflow.
15989 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15992 \begin_layout Standard
15993 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15995 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16001 \begin_layout Description
16003 \begin_inset space ~
16006 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16010 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16013 \begin_layout Description
16015 \begin_inset space ~
16022 ) This uses the program
16024 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16027 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16030 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16033 is a new engine, derived from
16037 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16038 access (see section
16039 \begin_inset space ~
16043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16045 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16050 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16051 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16056 \begin_layout Description
16058 \begin_inset space ~
16065 ) This uses the program
16070 that converts your file directly to PDF.
16076 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16077 font access (see section
16078 \begin_inset space ~
16082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16084 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16089 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16090 vertically written Japanese.
16093 \begin_layout Description
16095 \begin_inset space ~
16098 (cropped) This is the same as
16101 \begin_inset space ~
16106 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
16107 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
16108 to generate good-looking
16109 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
16112 \begin_layout Description
16114 \begin_inset space ~
16117 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
16121 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
16125 \begin_layout Description
16127 \begin_inset space ~
16130 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
16134 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
16135 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
16139 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
16140 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
16143 \begin_layout Standard
16147 \begin_inset space ~
16156 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
16157 works without problems.
16158 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
16159 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
16163 \begin_inset space ~
16171 \begin_inset space ~
16176 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16184 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16186 \begin_inset Index idx
16189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16190 FileFormats ! XHTML
16196 \begin_inset Index idx
16199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16208 \begin_layout Standard
16209 This file type has the extension
16210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16222 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16223 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16224 When \SpecialChar LyX
16225 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16226 suitable for the purpose.
16227 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16230 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16233 between different formats, which are described in section
16235 Math Output in XHTML
16240 \begin_inset space ~
16248 \begin_layout Standard
16249 XHTML output remains
16250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16257 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16258 features are supported yet.
16262 and the World Wide Web
16266 Additional Features
16268 manual, for more information.
16271 \begin_layout Standard
16272 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16274 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16275 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16281 \begin_layout Subsection
16283 \begin_inset Index idx
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16295 \begin_layout Standard
16296 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16297 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16306 or use the toolbar button
16313 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16314 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16315 \begin_inset space ~
16319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16321 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16325 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16327 \begin_inset space ~
16331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16333 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16338 Further output formats can be selected via
16340 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16341 View (Other Formats)
16343 or the toolbar button
16352 \begin_layout Standard
16353 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16354 viewer window using the menu
16356 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16362 Update (Other Formats)
16367 \begin_layout Standard
16368 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16371 To have a real output, export your document.
16374 \begin_layout Section
16375 A few Words about Typography
16376 \begin_inset Index idx
16379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16388 \begin_layout Subsection
16389 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16390 \begin_inset Index idx
16393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16400 \begin_inset Index idx
16403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16412 \begin_layout Standard
16413 In \SpecialChar LyX
16415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16426 symbol comes in four variants: the
16443 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16449 \begin_layout Standard
16450 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16460 height_special "totalheight"
16465 backgroundcolor "none"
16468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16469 \begin_inset Tabular
16470 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16471 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16472 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16473 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16474 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16475 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16476 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16504 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16505 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16544 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16545 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16567 system key combination
16571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16572 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16584 and the em dash with
16587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16600 is the Mac label for the right
16611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16624 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16625 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16647 system key combination or
16648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16662 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16675 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16714 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16720 \begin_layout Standard
16721 Dashes can also be inserted with
16723 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16725 \begin_inset space ~
16728 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16736 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16737 and 2014 for the en dash).
16740 \begin_layout Standard
16741 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16742 mode and has a length of its own.
16743 Here are some examples:
16746 \begin_layout Enumerate
16747 line- and page-breaks
16748 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16758 \begin_layout Enumerate
16760 \begin_inset space ~
16764 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16774 \begin_layout Enumerate
16775 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16776 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16786 \begin_layout Enumerate
16787 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16791 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16801 \begin_layout Standard
16803 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16805 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16806 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16814 \begin_layout Subsection
16815 Dashes and Line Breaks
16816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16818 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16825 \begin_layout Standard
16826 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
16827 case and locale, e.
16828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16834 \begin_layout Itemize
16835 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
16836 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16839 \begin_layout Itemize
16840 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16844 \begin_layout Itemize
16845 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16846 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16849 \begin_layout Standard
16850 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
16851 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16862 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
16865 \begin_layout Enumerate
16866 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
16867 \begin_inset space ~
16870 – common in British English and generally recommended by
16872 The Elements of Typographic Style
16875 \begin_inset space ~
16878 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
16881 \begin_layout Enumerate
16882 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16889 Prevent Hyphenation
16894 \begin_inset space ~
16910 in \SpecialChar TeX
16916 \begin_layout Itemize
16918 \begin_inset space ~
16922 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16932 height_special "totalheight"
16937 backgroundcolor "none"
16940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16949 \begin_layout Itemize
16953 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16963 height_special "totalheight"
16968 backgroundcolor "none"
16971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16975 \begin_inset space ~
16983 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16984 \begin_inset space ~
16987 – sont très utiles.
16990 \begin_layout Itemize
16997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17006 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17010 \begin_layout Standard
17011 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17012 \begin_inset space ~
17015 – in contrast to an overfull line
17016 \begin_inset space ~
17019 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17023 \begin_layout Standard
17024 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17028 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17029 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17030 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17035 \begin_layout Enumerate
17036 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17037 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17038 or \SpecialChar TeX
17044 \begin_layout Itemize
17048 \begin_inset space ~
17051 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17052 \begin_inset space ~
17055 – sont très utiles.
17059 \begin_layout Enumerate
17060 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
17061 \begin_inset Newline newline
17066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17067 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17068 Optional line break
17074 \begin_layout Itemize
17075 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17076 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
17077 should be followed by
17078 a line break opportunity.
17081 \begin_layout Standard
17082 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
17083 \begin_inset space ~
17087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17089 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17100 \begin_layout Enumerate
17101 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17102 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
17103 or en dashes (see section
17104 \begin_inset space ~
17108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17110 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
17120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17121 Changes and backwards compatibility
17124 \begin_layout Standard
17125 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
17127 \begin_inset space ~
17130 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
17131 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
17133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17140 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
17141 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17149 \begin_layout Standard
17150 Since \SpecialChar LyX
17152 \begin_inset space ~
17155 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17157 prevents ligation to dashes.
17159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17166 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
17171 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
17172 after the input (unless the current text font is
17180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17181 The behavior was changed since
17182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17197 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
17198 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
17199 as non-breakable dashes.
17200 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
17209 \begin_layout Standard
17212 \begin_inset space ~
17220 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
17222 \begin_inset space ~
17225 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
17228 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17229 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17230 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17231 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17233 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
17237 If you used both literal and
17238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17245 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17247 \begin_inset space ~
17250 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
17251 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
17254 \begin_layout Subsection
17256 \begin_inset Index idx
17259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17268 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17275 \begin_layout Standard
17276 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17277 but automatically in the output.
17278 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17284 \begin_inset Index idx
17287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17294 following the rules of the document language.
17296 does not hyphenate text in the
17300 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
17303 \begin_layout Standard
17305 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17309 font and with unusual constructs, like
17310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17318 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17319 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17320 This is done with the menu
17322 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17323 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17325 \begin_inset space ~
17331 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17333 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17337 \begin_layout Standard
17338 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17339 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17350 would then see the hyphen
17351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17358 as a line break possibility.
17359 A line break at this point would look ugly.
17360 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
17363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17364 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17367 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17369 Prevent Hyphenation
17374 \begin_inset space ~
17382 \begin_layout Subsection
17384 \begin_inset Index idx
17387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17397 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17400 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17407 \begin_layout Standard
17408 When \SpecialChar LyX
17409 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17410 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17412 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17418 appropriate amount of space.
17419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17422 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17424 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17425 gets after another word.
17428 \begin_layout Standard
17429 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17430 not work in all cases.
17432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17443 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17444 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17447 \begin_layout Standard
17448 Here are some examples of
17452 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17455 \begin_layout Itemize
17460 \begin_layout Itemize
17465 \begin_layout Standard
17466 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17469 \begin_layout Itemize
17471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17475 this is too much space!
17478 \begin_layout Itemize
17483 \begin_layout Standard
17484 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17487 \begin_layout Standard
17488 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17491 \begin_layout Enumerate
17495 \begin_inset space ~
17500 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17501 \begin_inset space ~
17505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17507 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17512 \begin_inset Index idx
17515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17516 Spaces ! inter-word
17524 \begin_layout Enumerate
17528 \begin_inset space ~
17533 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17534 \begin_inset space ~
17538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17540 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17545 \begin_inset Index idx
17548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17557 \begin_layout Enumerate
17561 \begin_inset space ~
17565 \begin_inset space ~
17569 \begin_inset space ~
17576 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17578 \begin_inset space ~
17583 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17584 This function is also bound to
17587 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17593 \begin_layout Standard
17594 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17597 \begin_layout Itemize
17599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17603 \begin_inset space \space{}
17606 this is too much space!
17609 \begin_layout Itemize
17610 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17614 \begin_layout Standard
17615 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17616 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17618 will take care of this.
17621 \begin_layout Standard
17622 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17626 \begin_inset space ~
17632 feature described in the section
17634 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17639 Additional Features
17644 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17646 \begin_inset Index idx
17649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17650 Typography ! Quotation marks
17656 \begin_inset Index idx
17659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17660 Quotation marks | see
17664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17690 \begin_layout Standard
17692 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17693 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17694 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17704 The keyboard character,
17708 , generates this automatically.
17711 \begin_layout Standard
17712 You can specify what character the
17716 key produces by using the submenu
17722 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17726 \begin_inset Index idx
17729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17730 Document ! Settings
17735 dialog and switching the
17739 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17740 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17742 \begin_inset space ~
17748 \begin_layout Labeling
17749 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17761 \begin_inset space ~
17765 \begin_inset space ~
17769 \begin_inset Quotes els
17773 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17787 \begin_inset Quotes els
17791 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17794 quotation marks (as common, e.
17795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17801 \begin_layout Labeling
17802 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17805 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17809 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17813 \begin_inset space ~
17817 \begin_inset space ~
17821 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17825 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17831 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17835 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17839 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17843 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17846 quotation marks (as common, e.
17847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17853 \begin_layout Labeling
17854 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17857 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17861 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17865 \begin_inset space ~
17869 \begin_inset space ~
17873 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17877 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17883 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17887 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17891 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17895 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17898 quotation marks (as common, e.
17899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17905 \begin_layout Labeling
17906 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17909 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17913 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17917 \begin_inset space ~
17921 \begin_inset space ~
17925 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17929 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17935 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17939 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17943 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17947 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17950 quotation marks (as common, e.
17951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17957 \begin_layout Labeling
17958 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17961 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17965 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17969 \begin_inset space ~
17973 \begin_inset space ~
17977 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17981 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17987 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17991 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17995 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17999 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18002 quotation marks (as common, e.
18003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18006 g., in Switzerland)
18009 \begin_layout Labeling
18010 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18013 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18017 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18021 \begin_inset space ~
18025 \begin_inset space ~
18029 \begin_inset Quotes als
18033 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18039 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18043 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18047 \begin_inset Quotes als
18051 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18054 quotation marks (as common, e.
18055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18061 \begin_layout Labeling
18062 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18065 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18069 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18073 \begin_inset space ~
18077 \begin_inset space ~
18081 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18085 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18091 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18095 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
18099 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18103 \begin_inset Quotes qls
18106 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
18109 \begin_layout Labeling
18110 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18113 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18117 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18121 \begin_inset space ~
18125 \begin_inset space ~
18129 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18133 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18139 \begin_inset Quotes bld
18143 \begin_inset Quotes brd
18147 \begin_inset Quotes bls
18151 \begin_inset Quotes brs
18154 quotation marks (as common, e.
18155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18158 g., in Great Britain)
18161 \begin_layout Labeling
18162 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18165 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18169 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18173 \begin_inset space ~
18177 \begin_inset space ~
18181 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18185 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18191 \begin_inset Quotes fld
18195 \begin_inset Quotes frd
18199 \begin_inset Quotes fls
18203 \begin_inset Quotes frs
18206 quotation marks (as common, e.
18207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18213 \begin_layout Labeling
18214 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18217 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18221 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18225 \begin_inset space ~
18229 \begin_inset space ~
18233 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18237 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18243 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18247 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18251 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18255 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18258 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18263 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18264 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18265 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18266 the inner marks differ).
18274 \begin_layout Labeling
18275 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18278 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18282 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18286 \begin_inset space ~
18290 \begin_inset space ~
18294 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18298 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18304 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18308 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18312 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18316 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18319 quotation marks (as common, e.
18320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18326 \begin_layout Labeling
18327 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18330 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18334 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18342 \begin_inset space ~
18346 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18350 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18356 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18360 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18364 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18368 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18371 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18374 \begin_layout Labeling
18375 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18376 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18384 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18390 \begin_inset space ~
18394 \begin_inset space ~
18400 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18408 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18412 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18416 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18420 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18424 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18427 quotation marks (as common, e.
18428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18436 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18437 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18445 \begin_layout Labeling
18446 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18447 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18455 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18461 \begin_inset space ~
18465 \begin_inset space ~
18471 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18479 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18483 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18487 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18491 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18495 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18498 quotation marks (as common, e.
18499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18502 g., in North Korea and China)
18506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18507 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18508 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18516 \begin_layout Standard
18517 Inner quotation marks
18521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18522 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18523 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18524 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18532 does not necessarily mean
18533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18541 This is why we call them
18542 \begin_inset Quotes els
18546 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18562 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18564 \begin_inset Quotes els
18568 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18571 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18574 arg "quote-insert inner"
18579 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18585 \begin_layout Standard
18586 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18587 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18588 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18589 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18590 If you check the setting
18592 Use dynamic quotation marks
18596 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18597 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18600 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18601 they appear in a special color).
18602 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18603 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18608 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18611 \begin_layout Standard
18612 Individual quotation marks (i.
18613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18616 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18617 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18621 \begin_layout Subsection
18623 \begin_inset Index idx
18626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18627 Typography ! Ligatures
18633 \begin_inset Index idx
18636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18667 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18674 \begin_layout Standard
18675 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18676 print them as single characters.
18677 These groups are known as
18682 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18683 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18685 Here are the standard ligatures:
18688 \begin_layout Itemize
18692 \begin_layout Itemize
18696 \begin_layout Itemize
18700 \begin_layout Itemize
18704 \begin_layout Itemize
18708 \begin_layout Standard
18709 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18712 \begin_layout Standard
18713 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18714 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18722 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18738 To break a ligature, use
18740 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18741 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18743 \begin_inset space ~
18750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18761 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18778 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18786 \begin_layout Subsection
18788 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18790 \begin_inset Index idx
18793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18803 \begin_layout Standard
18806 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18807 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18811 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18814 \begin_layout Description
18816 The name of the game.
18819 \begin_layout Description
18821 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18825 \begin_layout Description
18827 The \SpecialChar TeX
18828 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18832 \begin_layout Description
18833 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18834 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18838 \begin_layout Standard
18839 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18845 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18853 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18854 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18855 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18856 converges to the number
18857 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18860 : The actual version is
18861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18869 , the previous one was
18870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18881 \begin_layout Subsection
18883 \begin_inset Index idx
18886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18895 \begin_layout Standard
18896 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18897 space between two words.
18898 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18908 for units use the menu
18910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18911 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18913 \begin_inset space ~
18921 arg "space-insert thin"
18927 \begin_layout Standard
18928 Here is an example to show the differences:
18931 \begin_layout Standard
18932 \begin_inset Tabular
18933 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18934 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18935 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18936 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18943 \begin_inset space ~
18947 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18959 space between number and unit
18966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18975 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 half space between number and unit
19000 \begin_layout Subsection
19002 \begin_inset Index idx
19005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19006 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19014 \begin_layout Standard
19015 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19017 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19018 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19019 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19020 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19021 These bits of text became known as
19032 \begin_layout Standard
19033 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19034 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19035 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19036 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19037 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19038 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19039 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19040 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19041 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19042 \begin_inset Newline newline
19050 \begin_inset Newline newline
19058 \begin_inset Newline newline
19061 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19062 preamble of your document to avoid them.
19063 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
19065 \begin_inset space ~
19069 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19071 key "latexcompanion"
19077 \begin_inset space ~
19081 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
19088 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19089 's page break mechanism.
19092 \begin_layout Chapter
19093 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
19094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19096 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
19103 \begin_layout Standard
19104 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
19107 \begin_inset space ~
19113 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
19116 \begin_layout Section
19118 \begin_inset Index idx
19121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19137 \begin_layout Standard
19139 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
19142 \begin_layout Description
19145 \begin_inset space ~
19148 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
19149 \begin_inset Newline newline
19153 \begin_inset Note Note
19156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19157 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
19165 \begin_layout Description
19166 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
19167 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
19168 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19171 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19172 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19174 \begin_inset space ~
19180 \begin_inset Newline newline
19184 \begin_inset Note Comment
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19188 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
19197 \begin_layout Description
19199 \begin_inset space ~
19202 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
19203 set in the document settings under
19205 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
19207 \begin_inset space ~
19213 \begin_inset Newline newline
19217 \begin_inset Newline newline
19221 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19230 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
19231 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
19236 of a comment that appears in the output.
19242 \begin_inset Newline newline
19246 \begin_inset Newline newline
19249 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19252 \begin_layout Standard
19253 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19265 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19268 \begin_layout Section
19270 \begin_inset Index idx
19273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19282 name "sec:Footnotes"
19289 \begin_layout Standard
19291 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19294 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19297 or the toolbar button
19300 arg "footnote-insert"
19312 \begin_inset Graphics
19313 filename clipart/footnote.png
19322 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19323 's representation of your footnote.
19333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19352 label, the box will
19356 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19357 Clicking on the box label again will close
19370 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19371 and click on the footnote
19386 \begin_layout Standard
19387 Here is an example footnote:
19395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19396 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19404 \begin_layout Standard
19405 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19406 position where the footnote box is placed.
19407 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19408 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19409 according to the document class.
19411 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19412 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19418 ey are described in the
19421 \begin_inset space ~
19429 \begin_layout Section
19431 \begin_inset Index idx
19434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19443 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19450 \begin_layout Standard
19451 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19453 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19455 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19457 \begin_inset space ~
19462 or the toolbar button
19465 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19491 appearing within your text.
19492 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19493 's representation of your margin
19502 \begin_layout Standard
19503 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19507 \begin_inset Marginal
19510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 This is a marginal note.
19520 \begin_layout Standard
19521 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19522 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19523 pages, right on odd pages.
19526 \begin_layout Standard
19527 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19530 \begin_inset space ~
19538 \begin_inset space ~
19546 \begin_layout Section
19547 Graphics and Images
19548 \begin_inset Index idx
19551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19558 \begin_inset Index idx
19561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19570 name "sec:Graphics"
19577 \begin_layout Standard
19578 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19579 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19582 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19591 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19594 \begin_layout Standard
19595 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19600 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19601 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19603 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19604 \begin_inset space ~
19608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19610 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19617 \begin_layout Standard
19622 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19623 of the image in the output.
19624 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19628 \begin_inset space ~
19632 \begin_inset space ~
19641 \begin_inset space ~
19645 \begin_inset space ~
19649 \begin_inset space ~
19654 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19655 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19663 \begin_layout Standard
19667 \begin_inset space ~
19671 \begin_inset space ~
19676 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19677 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19679 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19684 \begin_inset space ~
19689 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19690 with the image size is printed.
19693 \begin_layout Standard
19694 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19695 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19697 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19700 \begin_layout Standard
19702 \begin_inset Graphics
19703 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19711 \begin_layout Standard
19712 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19713 the image into a float, see section
19714 \begin_inset space ~
19718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19720 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19727 \begin_layout Subsection
19729 \begin_inset Index idx
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19741 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19748 \begin_layout Standard
19749 You can insert images in any known file format.
19750 But as we explained in section
19751 \begin_inset space ~
19755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19757 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19761 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19763 therefore uses the program
19767 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19768 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19769 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19770 \begin_inset space ~
19774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19776 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19783 \begin_layout Standard
19784 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19787 \begin_layout Description
19789 \begin_inset space ~
19792 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19793 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19794 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19798 Graphics Interchange Format
19799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19802 (GIF, file extension
19803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19815 \begin_inset Index idx
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19850 Portable Network Graphics
19851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19854 (PNG, file extension
19855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19867 \begin_inset Index idx
19870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19902 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19906 (JPG, file extension
19907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19931 \begin_inset Index idx
19934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 \begin_layout Description
19967 \begin_inset space ~
19970 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19972 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19973 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19974 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19975 \begin_inset Newline newline
19978 Scalable image formats can be
19979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19982 Scalable Vector Graphics
19983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19986 (SVG, file extension
19987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19999 \begin_inset Index idx
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20034 Encapsulated PostScript
20035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20038 (EPS, file extension
20039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20051 \begin_inset Index idx
20054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20086 Portable Document Format
20087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20090 (PDF, file extension
20091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20103 \begin_inset Index idx
20106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20121 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
20122 result will not be scalable.
20123 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
20128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20129 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
20137 \begin_layout Standard
20138 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
20145 \begin_layout Subsection
20146 Grouping of Image Settings
20147 \begin_inset Index idx
20150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20151 Images ! Settings grouping
20159 \begin_layout Standard
20160 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
20162 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
20163 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
20165 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
20166 need to manually change each of them.
20170 \begin_layout Standard
20171 A new group can be set by pressing the button
20174 \begin_inset space ~
20178 \begin_inset space ~
20190 \begin_inset space ~
20194 \begin_inset space ~
20200 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
20201 and checking the name of the desired group.
20203 \change_inserted 5863208 1518729806
20204 If there are too many images which need to be assigned to a single group
20205 you can simply put all of them into single selection and choose
20208 \begin_inset space ~
20212 \begin_inset space ~
20222 \begin_layout Section
20224 \begin_inset Index idx
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20243 \begin_layout Standard
20244 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
20247 arg "tabular-insert"
20252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20256 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
20257 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
20258 from the rest of the table.
20259 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
20260 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
20262 Here is an example table:
20265 \begin_layout Standard
20267 \begin_inset Tabular
20268 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20269 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20270 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20271 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20272 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20273 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20473 \begin_layout Subsection
20477 \begin_layout Standard
20478 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20481 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20485 This brings up the table dialog.
20486 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20487 cursor is placed currently.
20488 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20489 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20490 done on all of your selection.
20493 \begin_layout Standard
20494 In addition to the table dialog, the
20497 \begin_inset space ~
20502 helps you in setting table properties.
20503 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20506 \begin_layout Standard
20510 \begin_inset space ~
20515 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20516 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20517 current cell respectively.
20518 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20520 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20521 of text, see section
20522 \begin_inset space ~
20526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20528 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20535 \begin_layout Standard
20536 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20537 using the check box
20546 This will merge the cells to
20550 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20551 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20552 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20553 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20554 in the last row without the upper border:
20557 \begin_layout Standard
20559 \begin_inset Tabular
20560 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20561 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20563 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20564 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20565 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20576 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20696 \begin_layout Standard
20697 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20698 -arguments for the table.
20699 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20700 explained in the chapter
20707 \begin_inset space ~
20713 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20714 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20715 but are visible in the output.
20718 \begin_layout Standard
20719 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 Most DVI-viewers are
20731 able to display rotations.
20739 \begin_layout Standard
20744 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20749 adds lines for all cell borders.
20752 \begin_layout Subsection
20754 \begin_inset Index idx
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 Tables ! Multi-page
20764 \begin_inset Index idx
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 \begin_layout Standard
20777 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20780 \begin_inset space ~
20784 \begin_inset space ~
20792 \begin_inset space ~
20797 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20798 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20801 \begin_layout Description
20806 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20807 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20808 Except for the first page, if
20811 \begin_inset space ~
20819 \begin_layout Description
20823 \begin_inset space ~
20828 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20829 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20832 \begin_layout Description
20837 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20838 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20839 except for the last page, if
20842 \begin_inset space ~
20850 \begin_layout Description
20854 \begin_inset space ~
20859 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20860 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20863 \begin_layout Description
20864 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20865 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20867 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20871 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20874 \begin_inset space ~
20882 \begin_layout Standard
20883 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20884 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20885 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20891 In this context, first means first in this order:
20894 \begin_inset space ~
20906 \begin_inset space ~
20911 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20914 \begin_layout Standard
20916 \begin_inset Tabular
20917 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20918 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20919 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20920 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20921 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20922 <row endfirsthead="true">
20923 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20934 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20953 <row endfirsthead="true">
20954 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 <row endhead="true">
20987 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 <row endhead="true">
21018 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <row endfoot="true">
21051 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21071 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21102 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22061 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22072 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22103 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22134 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22165 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22227 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22258 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22289 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22320 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22444 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22475 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22506 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22599 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22630 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22661 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22692 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22754 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22816 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22878 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22909 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22940 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22971 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23002 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23032 <row endlastfoot="true">
23033 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23053 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23070 \begin_layout Subsection
23072 \begin_inset Index idx
23075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23084 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
23091 \begin_layout Standard
23092 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
23093 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
23094 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
23095 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
23099 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
23102 \begin_layout Standard
23103 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
23104 for the column in the table dialog.
23105 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
23106 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
23110 \begin_layout Standard
23112 \begin_inset Tabular
23113 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
23114 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23115 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23116 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
23117 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23137 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23206 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23262 This is longer now.
23267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23318 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23319 This is longer now.
23324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 \begin_layout Standard
23351 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23352 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23357 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23358 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23364 Selection with the mouse or with
23368 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23369 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23370 the selection from outside the table.
23373 \begin_layout Section
23375 \begin_inset Index idx
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23394 \begin_layout Subsection
23398 \begin_layout Standard
23399 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23400 have a fixed location.
23402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23409 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23417 \begin_inset space ~
23422 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23423 too many notes on the current page.
23426 \begin_layout Standard
23427 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23428 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23429 and pages without text.
23430 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23431 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23432 Floats are therefore numbered.
23433 Referencing is described in section
23434 \begin_inset space ~
23438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23440 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23447 \begin_layout Standard
23448 To insert a float, use the menu
23450 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23454 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23455 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23457 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23458 \begin_inset Index idx
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23467 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23468 paragraph within the float.
23469 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23470 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23471 left-clicking on the box label.
23472 A closed float box looks like this:
23473 \begin_inset Graphics
23474 filename clipart/float.png
23479 – a gray button with a red label.
23482 \begin_layout Standard
23483 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23485 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23488 \begin_layout Subsection
23490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23492 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23497 \begin_inset Index idx
23500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23501 Floats ! Figure floats
23509 \begin_layout Standard
23511 \begin_inset space ~
23515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23517 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23521 was created using the menu
23523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23524 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23530 arg "float-insert figure"
23534 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23537 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23543 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23547 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23548 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23550 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23552 \begin_inset space ~
23560 arg "layout-paragraph"
23566 \begin_layout Standard
23567 \begin_inset Float figure
23572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 \begin_inset Graphics
23575 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23585 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23590 name "fig:A-star-in"
23607 \begin_layout Standard
23608 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23609 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23620 ) and refer to it using the menu
23622 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23628 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23632 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23633 vague references like
23634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23641 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23642 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23652 For more about cross-references, see section
23653 \begin_inset space ~
23657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23659 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23666 \begin_layout Standard
23667 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23668 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23669 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23670 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23671 as described in section
23672 \begin_inset space ~
23676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23678 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23684 \begin_inset space ~
23688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23690 reference "fig:Two-images"
23694 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23695 You can also set the images one below the other.
23697 \begin_inset space ~
23701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23703 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23710 reference "fig:Star"
23714 are the subfigures.
23717 \begin_layout Standard
23718 \begin_inset Float figure
23723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23724 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23728 \begin_inset Float figure
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23734 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23739 name "fig:Undefinable"
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23752 \begin_inset Graphics
23753 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23765 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23769 \begin_inset Float figure
23774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23793 \begin_inset Graphics
23794 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23806 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23818 name "fig:Two-images"
23835 \begin_layout Subsection
23837 \begin_inset Index idx
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 Floats ! Table floats
23849 \begin_layout Standard
23850 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23853 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23856 or the toolbar button
23859 arg "float-insert table"
23863 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23864 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23865 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23867 \begin_inset space ~
23871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23873 reference "tab:Table-float"
23880 \begin_layout Standard
23881 \begin_inset Float table
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23887 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23892 name "tab:Table-float"
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 \begin_inset Tabular
23907 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23908 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23909 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23910 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24059 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24062 \end{array}\right]$
24070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
24104 \begin_layout Subsection
24106 \begin_inset Index idx
24109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 \begin_layout Standard
24120 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
24121 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
24122 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
24124 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
24132 \begin_inset space ~
24140 \begin_layout Section
24142 \begin_inset Index idx
24145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24154 \begin_layout Standard
24156 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
24158 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
24159 \begin_inset space \space{}
24166 \begin_layout Standard
24167 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
24168 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
24170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24174 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
24175 and its alignment within the page.
24178 \begin_layout Standard
24180 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24190 height_special "totalheight"
24195 backgroundcolor "none"
24198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24201 This is a minipage.
24202 The text is set in an italic style.
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24208 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
24209 another formatting.
24217 \begin_layout Standard
24218 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24221 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
24225 as described in section
24226 \begin_inset space ~
24230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24232 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
24237 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
24243 \begin_layout Standard
24244 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24254 height_special "totalheight"
24259 backgroundcolor "none"
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24263 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24264 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24270 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24274 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24284 height_special "totalheight"
24289 backgroundcolor "none"
24292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24294 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24302 \begin_layout Standard
24303 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24309 \begin_layout Standard
24310 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24312 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24319 \begin_inset space ~
24327 \begin_layout Chapter
24328 Mathematical Formulas
24329 \begin_inset Index idx
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 \begin_inset Index idx
24342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24373 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24380 \begin_layout Standard
24381 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24386 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24389 \begin_layout Section
24391 \begin_inset Index idx
24394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24403 \begin_layout Standard
24404 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24417 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24419 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24420 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24421 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24429 \begin_layout Standard
24430 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24434 \begin_inset space ~
24439 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24442 \begin_layout Standard
24443 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24444 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24447 \begin_layout Standard
24448 This is a line with an inline formula
24449 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24455 \begin_layout Standard
24456 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24457 paragraph, like this one:
24458 \begin_inset Formula
24465 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24468 \begin_layout Standard
24470 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24472 For example, typing
24473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24486 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24487 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24491 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24494 \begin_inset space ~
24502 \begin_layout Subsection
24503 Navigating in Formulas
24504 \begin_inset Index idx
24507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24516 \begin_layout Standard
24517 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24518 achieved with the arrow keys.
24520 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24521 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24526 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24527 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24531 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24535 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24538 \end{array}\right]$
24546 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24551 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24552 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24555 \begin_layout Standard
24560 , printed in this document as
24561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24565 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24572 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24573 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24574 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24579 For example, if you want
24580 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24588 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24598 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24602 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24607 , since in the latter case only the
24610 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24615 will be under the square root sign:
24616 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24622 \begin_layout Standard
24623 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24625 \begin_inset Formula
24627 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24636 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24637 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24640 \begin_layout Subsection
24644 \begin_layout Standard
24645 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24646 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24650 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24651 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24652 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24653 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24654 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24658 \begin_layout Subsection
24659 Exponents and Subscripts
24660 \begin_inset Index idx
24663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24670 \begin_inset Index idx
24673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24682 \begin_layout Standard
24683 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24686 arg "math-superscript"
24692 arg "math-subscript"
24695 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24697 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24700 , type in a formula
24703 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24713 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24719 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24723 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24729 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24735 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24744 , you have to use an extra
24748 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24749 For example, if you want
24750 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24756 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24762 Subscripts are similar: To get
24763 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24769 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24777 \begin_layout Subsection
24779 \begin_inset Index idx
24782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24791 \begin_layout Standard
24792 Create a fraction either with the command
24798 or by using the icon
24801 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24807 \begin_inset space ~
24813 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24814 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24815 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24820 To move back up, press
24825 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24826 \begin_inset Formula
24828 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24831 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24839 \begin_layout Subsection
24841 \begin_inset Index idx
24844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24853 \begin_layout Standard
24854 Roots can be created using the
24857 \begin_inset space ~
24865 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24871 arg "math-insert \\root"
24893 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24899 always produces a square root.
24902 \begin_layout Subsection
24903 Operators with Limits
24904 \begin_inset Index idx
24907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24914 \begin_inset Index idx
24917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24926 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24933 \begin_layout Standard
24935 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24939 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24942 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24943 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24944 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24945 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24946 The sum operator will automatically place its
24947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24954 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24956 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24960 \begin_inset Formula
24962 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24967 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24971 \begin_layout Standard
24972 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24974 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24975 behind the operator and using the menu
24977 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24978 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24980 \begin_inset space ~
24984 \begin_inset space ~
24998 \begin_layout Standard
24999 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25008 \begin_inset Index idx
25011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25018 \begin_inset Formula
25020 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25025 which will place the
25026 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25038 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25039 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25045 \begin_layout Standard
25046 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25053 Have a look at section
25054 \begin_inset space ~
25058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25060 reference "subsec:Functions"
25064 for an explanation of function macros.
25067 \begin_layout Subsection
25069 \begin_inset Index idx
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25081 \begin_layout Standard
25082 Most math symbols can be found in the
25085 \begin_inset space ~
25090 under one of several categories; including
25107 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
25111 \begin_layout Standard
25112 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25113 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
25114 don't have to use the
25117 \begin_inset space ~
25122 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
25124 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
25127 \begin_layout Subsection
25129 \begin_inset Index idx
25132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25141 \begin_layout Standard
25142 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
25148 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
25154 \begin_inset space ~
25162 arg "math-insert \\space"
25166 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
25167 For example, the sequence
25172 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
25175 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25177 \begin_inset Graphics
25178 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
25183 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
25184 the space marker and enter space again several times.
25185 With every space enter the size will be changed.
25186 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
25187 , because they are negative
25189 Here are two examples:
25192 \begin_layout Standard
25202 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
25208 \begin_layout Standard
25218 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
25224 \begin_layout Subsection
25226 \begin_inset Index idx
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25238 name "subsec:Functions"
25245 \begin_layout Standard
25249 \begin_inset space ~
25254 contains under the button
25257 arg "math-insert \\functions"
25260 a number of function macros, such as
25261 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
25265 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
25273 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
25280 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
25281 avoid confusions, because
25282 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
25286 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
25292 \begin_layout Standard
25293 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
25295 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
25299 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
25305 \begin_layout Standard
25306 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
25307 are placed, as described in section
25308 \begin_inset space ~
25312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25314 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25321 \begin_layout Subsection
25323 \begin_inset Index idx
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25335 \begin_layout Standard
25336 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25338 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25339 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25340 commands, for example, to enter
25341 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25344 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25345 Our example is entered by typing
25350 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25357 \begin_inset space ~
25361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25363 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25367 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25370 \begin_layout Standard
25371 \begin_inset Float table
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25377 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25382 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25386 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25396 \begin_inset Tabular
25397 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25398 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25399 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25400 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25401 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25485 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25593 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25647 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25701 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25755 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25809 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25863 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25917 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25962 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25983 \begin_layout Standard
25984 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25987 \begin_inset space ~
25995 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25998 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26002 \begin_layout Section
26003 Brackets and Delimiters
26004 \begin_inset Index idx
26007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26014 \begin_inset Index idx
26017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26026 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26033 \begin_layout Standard
26034 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26036 For some purposes, using just the keys
26041 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26042 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26043 toolbar delimiter icon
26046 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26050 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26051 \begin_inset Formula
26053 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26061 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26062 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26066 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26069 and the expression on the right was entered using the
26075 \begin_inset Formula
26077 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
26085 \begin_layout Standard
26086 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
26087 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
26091 \begin_layout Standard
26092 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
26093 left side and right side.
26094 If you use the option
26097 \begin_inset space ~
26102 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
26103 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
26105 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
26110 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
26111 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
26114 \begin_layout Standard
26115 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
26116 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
26117 is to go inside the brackets.
26118 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
26123 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
26124 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
26125 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
26129 arg "math-delim ( )"
26135 \begin_layout Section
26136 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
26137 \begin_inset Index idx
26140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26147 \begin_inset Index idx
26150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26157 \begin_inset Index idx
26160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26161 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26169 \begin_layout Standard
26170 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26174 \begin_inset space ~
26182 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
26186 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
26187 Here is an example:
26188 \begin_inset Formula
26190 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26199 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
26200 \begin_inset space ~
26204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26206 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26211 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
26212 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
26213 This alignment is set in the box
26218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26267 for every column as default.
26268 For example, the sequence
26269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26280 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26281 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26282 corresponds to the relevant column.
26283 The result will look like this:
26284 \begin_inset Formula
26287 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26288 column & has & has\,right\\
26289 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26298 \begin_layout Standard
26299 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26302 arg "newline-insert newline"
26305 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26306 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26308 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26311 or the math toolbar.
26314 \begin_layout Standard
26315 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26316 It can be created with the menu
26318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26319 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26321 \begin_inset space ~
26333 Here is an example:
26334 \begin_inset Formula
26348 \begin_layout Standard
26349 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26352 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26355 arg "newline-insert newline"
26359 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26364 arg "newline-insert newline"
26367 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26375 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26376 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26377 A new row is created by every further entry of
26380 arg "newline-insert newline"
26384 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26385 Here is an example:
26386 \begin_inset Formula
26388 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26389 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26394 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26395 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26396 \begin_inset Formula
26398 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26406 \begin_layout Standard
26407 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26414 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26415 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26418 reference "eq:asquared"
26423 The other types are described in section
26424 \begin_inset space ~
26428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26430 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26437 \begin_layout Section
26438 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26439 \begin_inset Index idx
26442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26443 Math ! Formula numbering
26449 \begin_inset Index idx
26452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26453 Math ! Referencing formulas
26459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26461 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26468 \begin_layout Standard
26469 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26471 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26472 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26474 \begin_inset space ~
26478 \begin_inset space ~
26486 arg "math-number-toggle"
26490 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26491 within parentheses.
26492 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26493 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26494 the document class.
26495 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26496 separated by a dot:
26497 \begin_inset Formula
26507 arg "math-number-toggle"
26510 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26511 You can only number displayed formulas.
26514 \begin_layout Standard
26515 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26518 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26520 \begin_inset space ~
26524 \begin_inset space ~
26532 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26535 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26536 \begin_inset Formula
26539 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26545 To number all lines use the shortcut
26548 arg "math-number-toggle"
26554 \begin_layout Standard
26555 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26558 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26559 A label is inserted with the menu
26561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26570 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26571 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26572 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26584 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26585 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26586 We inserted in the following example the label
26587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26594 in the second line:
26595 \begin_inset Formula
26597 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26598 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26603 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26604 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26605 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26607 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26609 \begin_inset space ~
26617 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26621 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26622 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26623 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26624 as the formula number:
26627 \begin_layout Standard
26628 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26631 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26638 \begin_layout Standard
26639 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26640 's cross-reference box are described in section
26641 \begin_inset space ~
26645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26647 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26652 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26660 \begin_layout Section
26661 User defined math macros
26662 \begin_inset Index idx
26665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26674 \begin_layout Standard
26676 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26677 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26678 Math macros are explained in section
26681 \begin_inset space ~
26693 \begin_layout Section
26697 \begin_layout Subsection
26699 \begin_inset Index idx
26702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26711 \begin_layout Standard
26712 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26713 To set a font in a formula, use the
26716 \begin_inset space ~
26724 arg "math-insert \\font"
26727 , or enter its command, listed in table
26728 \begin_inset space ~
26732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26734 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26741 \begin_layout Standard
26742 \begin_inset Float table
26747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26748 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26753 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26757 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26767 \begin_inset Tabular
26768 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
26769 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26770 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26771 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26803 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26830 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26857 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26890 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26917 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26945 \change_inserted 5863344 1592056341
26946 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
26954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26959 \change_inserted 5863344 1592056356
26971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26975 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27009 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27037 \change_inserted 5863344 1592056386
27038 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
27046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27051 \change_inserted 5863344 1592056396
27063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27067 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27101 \begin_layout Standard
27102 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27110 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27113 \change_inserted 5863344 1592056434
27114 , Double stroke, Script
27130 \begin_layout Standard
27131 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27132 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27137 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27138 space when you need a space in the box.
27139 Here is an example where
27140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27151 denotes the set of numbers:
27152 \begin_inset Formula
27154 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
27162 \begin_layout Standard
27163 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
27164 You can, for example, put a character in
27173 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
27177 \begin_inset Newline newline
27180 So it is better not to use this feature.
27183 \begin_layout Standard
27184 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
27185 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
27189 \begin_inset Newline newline
27192 You can only print them emboldened using the command
27198 , which works like the other typeface commands:
27199 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
27205 \begin_layout Standard
27212 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
27215 \begin_layout Standard
27216 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
27218 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27219 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27221 \begin_inset space ~
27229 \begin_layout Subsection
27231 \begin_inset Index idx
27234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27243 \begin_layout Standard
27244 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
27246 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
27250 \begin_inset space ~
27254 \begin_inset space ~
27262 \begin_inset space ~
27270 arg "math-insert \\font"
27274 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27275 in black instead of blue.
27276 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
27277 Here is an example:
27278 \begin_inset Formula
27281 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
27282 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
27291 \begin_layout Subsection
27293 \begin_inset Index idx
27296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27305 \begin_layout Standard
27306 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
27307 automatically chosen in most situations.
27325 For most characters,
27333 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27334 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27339 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27340 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27341 thinks are appropriate.
27342 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27345 arg "math-insert \\style"
27349 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27350 For example, you can set
27351 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27354 , which is normally in
27363 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27367 The four styles are used in the following example:
27370 \begin_layout Standard
27371 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27375 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27379 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27383 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27389 \begin_layout Standard
27390 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27391 is set in a particular size with the menu
27393 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27395 \begin_inset space ~
27400 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27401 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27402 will be adjusted to correspond.
27403 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27414 \begin_layout Standard
27418 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27424 \begin_layout Section
27425 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27427 \begin_inset Index idx
27430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27437 \begin_inset Index idx
27440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27449 \begin_layout Standard
27451 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27452 that are in common use.
27455 \begin_layout Subsection
27456 Enabling AMS-Support
27459 \begin_layout Standard
27460 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27461 the document by selecting the checkbox
27464 \begin_inset space ~
27468 \begin_inset space ~
27472 \begin_inset space ~
27479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27483 \begin_inset Index idx
27486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27487 Document ! Settings
27495 \begin_inset space ~
27501 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27502 -errors in formulas,
27503 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27506 \begin_layout Subsection
27508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27510 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27515 \begin_inset Index idx
27518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27519 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27527 \begin_layout Standard
27528 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27529 provides a selection of different formula types.
27531 allows you to choose between
27552 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27553 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27560 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27563 \begin_layout Chapter
27567 \begin_layout Section
27569 \begin_inset Index idx
27572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27581 name "sec:Cross-References"
27588 \begin_layout Standard
27589 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27590 's strengths is cross-references.
27591 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27593 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27594 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27595 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27598 \begin_layout Enumerate
27602 \begin_layout Enumerate
27603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27605 name "enu:Second-item"
27612 \begin_layout Enumerate
27616 \begin_layout Standard
27617 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27619 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27622 or by pressing the toolbar button
27629 A gray label box like this:
27630 \begin_inset Graphics
27631 filename clipart/label.png
27635 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27637 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27672 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27673 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27689 \begin_layout Standard
27690 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27695 or the toolbar button
27698 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27702 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27703 \begin_inset Graphics
27704 filename clipart/reference.png
27708 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27710 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27723 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27727 \begin_layout Standard
27728 As an alternative to
27730 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27733 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27738 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27739 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27741 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27753 \begin_layout Standard
27754 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27755 \begin_inset space ~
27759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27761 reference "enu:Second-item"
27768 \begin_layout Standard
27769 It is recommended to use a protected space
27773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27774 described in section
27775 \begin_inset space ~
27779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27781 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27790 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27791 line breaks between them.
27794 \begin_layout Standard
27795 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27798 \begin_layout Description
27799 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27802 reference "fig:Two-images"
27809 \begin_layout Description
27810 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27811 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27823 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27830 \begin_layout Description
27831 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27832 \begin_inset space ~
27836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27837 LatexCommand pageref
27838 reference "fig:Two-images"
27845 \begin_layout Description
27847 \begin_inset space ~
27851 \begin_inset space ~
27854 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27856 LatexCommand vpageref
27857 reference "fig:Two-images"
27862 \begin_inset Newline newline
27865 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27866 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27867 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27868 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27869 it prints “on the next page”.
27870 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27873 \begin_layout Description
27875 \begin_inset space ~
27879 \begin_inset space ~
27883 \begin_inset space ~
27886 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27889 reference "fig:Two-images"
27894 \begin_inset Newline newline
27897 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27903 ; otherwise it behaves like
27907 \begin_inset space ~
27911 \begin_inset space ~
27920 \begin_layout Description
27922 \begin_inset space ~
27925 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27926 \begin_inset Newline newline
27930 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27938 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27948 \begin_inset Index idx
27951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27953 packages ! prettyref
27959 \begin_inset Index idx
27962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27964 packages ! refstyle
27975 \begin_inset Newline newline
27978 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27979 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27982 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27995 is the default and preferred because
27999 supports only English documents.
28000 The format is specified by using the command
28012 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28013 preamble of the document.
28014 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28032 \begin_inset Newline newline
28039 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28044 \begin_inset Newline newline
28055 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28056 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28058 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28059 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28064 , you might do so as follows:
28065 \begin_inset Newline newline
28072 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28077 \begin_inset Newline newline
28080 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28081 the package documentation
28082 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28084 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28090 \begin_inset Newline newline
28101 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28108 \begin_layout Description
28110 \begin_inset space ~
28113 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28115 LatexCommand nameref
28116 reference "fig:Two-images"
28123 \begin_layout Description
28125 \begin_inset space ~
28128 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28129 label for the reference:
28130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28131 LatexCommand labelonly
28132 reference "fig:Two-images"
28137 \begin_inset Newline newline
28140 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
28141 Code, if you want to issue a command
28142 that \SpecialChar LyX
28148 , then you may want to use the
28151 \begin_inset space ~
28156 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
28158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28166 This is the form needed for e.
28167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28171 \begin_inset space \space{}
28178 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
28179 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
28181 The varieties are adjusted in the field
28185 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
28189 \begin_layout Standard
28190 You can only use the style
28194 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
28198 is always possible.
28201 \begin_layout Standard
28202 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
28203 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
28205 Referencing formulas is explained in section
28206 \begin_inset space ~
28210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28212 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28219 \begin_layout Standard
28220 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
28224 \begin_inset space ~
28228 \begin_inset space ~
28233 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
28234 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
28237 \begin_inset space ~
28242 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
28243 You can also go back with the toolbar button
28246 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
28252 \begin_layout Standard
28253 You can change labels at any time.
28254 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
28255 do not need to think about this.
28258 \begin_layout Standard
28259 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
28261 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
28265 \begin_layout Standard
28266 References are described in detail in the section
28267 \begin_inset space ~
28277 \begin_inset space ~
28285 \begin_layout Section
28286 Table of Contents and other Listings
28287 \begin_inset Index idx
28290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28297 \begin_inset Index idx
28300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28301 Navigating ! Outline
28307 \begin_inset Index idx
28310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28326 \begin_layout Subsection
28328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28330 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
28337 \begin_layout Standard
28338 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
28340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28341 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28343 \begin_inset space ~
28347 \begin_inset space ~
28353 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
28355 If you click on it, the
28359 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
28360 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
28361 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
28363 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
28365 \begin_inset space ~
28370 that is described in section
28371 \begin_inset space ~
28375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28377 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28384 \begin_layout Standard
28385 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28386 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28388 \begin_inset space ~
28392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28394 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28398 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28400 \begin_inset space ~
28404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28406 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28410 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28412 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28415 \begin_layout Subsection
28416 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28419 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28426 \begin_layout Standard
28427 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28429 You can insert them via the
28431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28435 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28438 \begin_layout Section
28439 URLs and Hyperlinks
28440 \begin_inset Index idx
28443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28450 \begin_inset Index idx
28453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28462 \begin_layout Subsection
28464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28473 \begin_layout Standard
28474 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28476 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28482 \begin_layout Standard
28483 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28485 \begin_inset Flex URL
28488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28490 https://www.lyx.org
28498 \begin_layout Standard
28499 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28505 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28509 \begin_layout Standard
28510 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28518 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28527 \begin_layout Subsection
28529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28531 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28538 \begin_layout Standard
28539 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28544 or with the toolbar button
28551 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28560 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28561 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28562 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28564 name "LyX's homepage"
28565 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28570 , an Email address like this:
28571 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28573 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28574 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28580 , or a link to a file.
28585 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28593 \begin_layout Standard
28594 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28607 to the link target.
28610 \begin_layout Standard
28611 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28612 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28613 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28614 the text style dialog.
28615 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28619 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28621 name "LyX's homepage"
28622 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28630 \begin_layout Standard
28631 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28635 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28638 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28642 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28644 \begin_inset Newline newline
28652 \begin_inset Newline newline
28659 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28662 \begin_layout Section
28664 \begin_inset Index idx
28667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28676 name "sec:Appendices"
28683 \begin_layout Standard
28684 Appendices are created with the menu
28686 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28688 \begin_inset space ~
28692 \begin_inset space ~
28698 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28699 as the appendix part of the book.
28700 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28703 \begin_layout Standard
28704 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28705 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28706 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28707 and the subsection number.
28708 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28712 \begin_layout Standard
28714 \begin_inset space ~
28718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28720 reference "chap:Credits"
28725 \begin_inset space ~
28729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28731 reference "subsec:Export"
28738 \begin_layout Section
28740 \begin_inset Index idx
28743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28752 name "sec:Bibliography"
28759 \begin_layout Standard
28760 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28762 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28763 \begin_inset space ~
28767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28769 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28776 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28781 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28782 \begin_inset space ~
28786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28788 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28793 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28794 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28795 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28799 using a bibliography database.
28802 \begin_layout Standard
28803 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28804 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28808 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28809 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28810 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28811 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28812 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28815 \begin_layout Subsection
28816 The Bibliography Environment
28817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28819 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28826 \begin_layout Standard
28831 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28833 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28842 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28844 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28845 of ASCII characters only.
28849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28851 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28854 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28860 \begin_inset Newline newline
28864 \begin_inset Flex URL
28867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28869 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28881 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28891 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28892 \begin_inset Newline newline
28899 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28900 the number of the entry.
28905 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28915 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28917 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28920 or the toolbar button
28923 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28927 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28928 containing the available citations.
28929 Select one or more keys from the list and
28939 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28940 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28944 \begin_layout Standard
28945 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28946 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28947 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28959 \begin_layout Standard
28963 Companion Second Edition
28966 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28968 key "latexcompanion"
28976 \begin_layout Standard
28977 The \SpecialChar LyX
28978 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28989 \begin_layout Standard
28990 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28997 \begin_inset Index idx
29000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29008 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29020 Author A and Author B(Year)
29021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29028 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29030 Then, if you select
29033 \begin_inset space ~
29038 in the document settings
29039 \begin_inset Index idx
29042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29043 Document ! Settings
29050 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29052 \begin_inset space ~
29058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29060 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29067 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29070 \begin_layout Standard
29071 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29074 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29076 \begin_inset space ~
29084 arg "layout-paragraph"
29088 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29091 \begin_layout Subsection
29092 Bibliography databases
29093 \begin_inset Index idx
29096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29097 Bibliography ! Databases
29103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29105 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29112 \begin_layout Standard
29113 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29119 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29121 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29122 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29127 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29129 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29130 your working field in a database.
29131 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29132 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29133 list for that document.
29134 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29138 \begin_layout Standard
29139 The database is a text file with the file extension
29140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29151 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
29152 The format is explained in
29153 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29160 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29162 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29164 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
29170 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
29171 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
29172 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
29174 \begin_inset Flex URL
29177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29179 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
29187 \begin_layout Standard
29189 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
29190 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29191 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
29193 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
29195 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
29196 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
29197 Those are addressed by
29202 \begin_inset Index idx
29205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29207 packages ! biblatex
29213 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29214 (although it has been significantly
29215 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29225 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29226 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29227 might conversely fail to correctly
29228 handle databases that use specific
29237 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
29241 \begin_layout Standard
29242 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29247 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
29249 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29253 \begin_inset Index idx
29256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29257 Document ! Settings
29269 \begin_inset space ~
29274 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29283 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29285 \begin_inset Index idx
29288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29289 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29298 \begin_layout Standard
29299 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29307 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29309 \begin_inset space ~
29315 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
29316 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29324 Add bibliography to TOC
29326 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29331 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29332 in the document or just the cited references.
29335 \begin_layout Standard
29336 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29337 style file is a text file with the file extension
29338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29349 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
29350 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29351 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
29352 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
29354 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29360 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29361 \begin_inset Newline newline
29365 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29367 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29377 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29382 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29386 \begin_layout Standard
29387 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29392 \begin_inset Index idx
29395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29396 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29402 \begin_inset Index idx
29405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29407 packages ! biblatex
29415 \begin_layout Standard
29416 Accessing a database via
29420 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29428 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29430 \begin_inset space ~
29436 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29437 you cannot select a
29442 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29446 \begin_layout Standard
29451 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29464 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29465 file (text file with the file extension
29466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29477 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29478 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29480 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29484 \begin_layout Standard
29489 styles are not set in the
29492 \begin_inset space ~
29497 dialog, but in the document settings.
29498 \begin_inset Index idx
29501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29502 Document ! Settings
29507 However, in the dialog in the
29511 field, which is only visible if you use
29515 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29516 example how its heading will appear).
29517 These options are described in detail in the
29522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29532 \begin_layout Standard
29533 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29534 \begin_inset space ~
29538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29540 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29551 Bibliography Processors
29554 \begin_layout Standard
29555 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29556 uses a bibliography processor,
29557 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29558 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29559 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29561 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29562 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29565 \begin_layout Standard
29566 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29568 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29569 You can do this on a general level in
29571 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29572 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29573 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29576 or for individual documents in
29578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29579 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29583 The following variants are available by default:
29586 \begin_layout Description
29587 biber a specific, modern processor
29588 \begin_inset Index idx
29591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29598 developed exclusively for
29602 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29608 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29613 makes use of; if you use the
29617 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29624 \begin_layout Description
29625 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29626 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29627 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29631 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29634 \begin_layout Description
29635 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29636 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29640 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29644 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29648 features are supported.
29651 \begin_layout Standard
29652 By default (with the
29658 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29659 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29672 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29673 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29674 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29677 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29678 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29691 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29692 -based bibliography styles).
29693 This should suit most needs.
29696 \begin_layout Standard
29697 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29698 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29699 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29704 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29705 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29706 You can adjust it in
29708 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29709 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29710 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29716 \begin_layout Standard
29717 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29718 can add below the selection.
29719 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29720 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29726 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29736 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29740 \begin_layout Standard
29742 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29744 These are explained in detail in section
29746 Customizing Bibliographies
29750 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29755 Additional Features
29760 \begin_layout Subsection
29762 \begin_inset Index idx
29765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29766 Bibliography ! Citation format
29772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29774 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29781 \begin_layout Standard
29782 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29787 \begin_inset space \space{}
29790 numerical citation (as
29791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29798 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29806 ) or author-year citations (as
29807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29816 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29820 \begin_layout Standard
29821 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29824 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29825 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29829 \begin_inset Index idx
29832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29833 Document ! Settings
29838 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29844 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29845 labels, is there to use
29848 \begin_inset space ~
29859 \begin_inset space ~
29864 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29867 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29874 \begin_layout Standard
29875 With a bibliography database (see
29876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29878 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29885 ) one has in contrary to the
29889 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29890 These style formats are available:
29893 \begin_layout Description
29895 \begin_inset space ~
29898 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29899 -based approached without any additional packages
29900 (simple numeric citations).
29903 \begin_layout Description
29904 Biblatex loads the package
29909 \begin_inset Index idx
29912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29914 packages ! biblatex
29919 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29921 Biblatex citation style
29925 Biblatex bibliography style
29928 Options to the package
29932 can be entered in the
29939 \begin_layout Description
29941 \begin_inset space ~
29945 \begin_inset space ~
29948 mode) loads the package
29952 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29953 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29965 behavior very closely.
29970 this option has some additional styles.
29975 styles are also supported by this variant.
29978 \begin_layout Description
29980 \begin_inset space ~
29983 (BibTeX) loads the package
29988 \begin_inset Index idx
29991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29998 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30001 \begin_layout Description
30003 \begin_inset space ~
30006 (BibTeX) loads the package
30011 \begin_inset Index idx
30014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30021 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30024 \begin_layout Standard
30033 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30035 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30044 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30046 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30047 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30049 Biblatex citation style
30052 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30058 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30062 \begin_layout Standard
30063 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30064 are available in the
30069 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30070 a name prefix such as
30071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30086 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30091 \begin_inset space \space{}
30095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30106 \begin_layout Standard
30107 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
30109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30113 \begin_inset space \space{}
30116 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30122 \begin_inset space \space{}
30126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30138 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30142 \begin_inset space ~
30150 \begin_inset space ~
30156 Here is a simple example where the text
30157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30161 \begin_inset space ~
30165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30168 appears after the reference:
30171 \begin_layout Quote
30173 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30176 key "latexcompanion"
30184 \begin_layout Standard
30185 All styles except for
30189 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
30191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30199 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30205 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
30206 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
30211 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
30212 multi-citation (so-called
30213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30216 qualified citation lists
30217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30223 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
30228 dialog will display three columns in the field
30235 \begin_inset space ~
30243 \begin_inset space ~
30251 \begin_inset space ~
30257 If you double-click on an item's
30260 \begin_inset space ~
30268 \begin_inset space ~
30273 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30276 General text before
30282 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30285 \begin_layout Section
30287 \begin_inset Index idx
30290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30306 \begin_layout Standard
30307 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30311 \begin_inset space ~
30316 or the toolbar button
30323 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30324 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30325 by \SpecialChar LyX
30326 as the index entry.
30329 \begin_layout Standard
30330 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30332 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30333 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30335 \begin_inset space ~
30341 A light blue box labeled
30342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30353 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30354 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30358 \begin_layout Standard
30359 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30360 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30361 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30362 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30366 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30374 \begin_layout Subsection
30375 Grouping Index Entries
30376 \begin_inset Index idx
30379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30388 \begin_layout Standard
30389 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30391 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30392 lists under the entry
30393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30401 First we create the entry
30402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30410 \begin_inset space ~
30414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30416 reference "subsec:Lists"
30421 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30422 \begin_inset space ~
30426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30428 reference "sec:Itemize"
30432 , we insert the command
30435 \begin_layout Standard
30441 \begin_layout Standard
30445 \begin_layout Standard
30451 \begin_layout Standard
30452 for the enumerated list in section
30453 \begin_inset space ~
30457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30459 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30466 \begin_layout Standard
30467 The exclamation mark
30468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30475 marks the grouping levels.
30476 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30477 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30478 If we don't have an index entry for
30479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30486 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30489 \begin_layout Subsection
30491 \begin_inset Index idx
30494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30495 Index ! Page ranges
30503 \begin_layout Standard
30504 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30506 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30507 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30508 an index entry in section
30509 \begin_inset space ~
30513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30515 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30525 Paragraph environments|(
30528 \begin_layout Standard
30529 and another entry at the end of section
30530 \begin_inset space ~
30534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30536 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30543 \begin_layout Standard
30546 Paragraph environments|)
30549 \begin_layout Standard
30551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30574 respectively start and end the index range.
30575 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30576 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30577 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30578 An example is the index entry
30579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30582 Document ! Settings
30583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30589 \begin_layout Subsection
30591 \begin_inset Index idx
30594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30595 Index ! Cross referencing
30603 \begin_layout Standard
30604 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30605 We referred for example in the index entry
30606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30614 \begin_inset space ~
30618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30620 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30624 ) to the index entry
30625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30632 in the same section using the entry
30635 \begin_layout Standard
30638 GIF|see{Image formats}
30641 \begin_layout Standard
30642 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30644 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30645 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30648 \begin_layout Subsection
30650 \begin_inset Index idx
30653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30654 Index ! Entry order
30662 \begin_layout Standard
30663 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30664 follow the rules for the index order.
30665 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30671 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30673 \begin_inset space ~
30677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30679 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30688 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30689 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30714 \begin_inset Index idx
30717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30718 Dummy entries ! maïs
30724 \begin_inset Index idx
30727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30728 Dummy entries ! maître
30734 \begin_inset Index idx
30737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30738 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30743 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30744 maïs, maison, maître.
30745 To achieve this, we use the command
30748 \begin_layout Standard
30751 previous entry@current entry
30754 \begin_layout Standard
30755 In our case we want to have
30756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30771 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30774 \begin_layout Standard
30780 \begin_layout Standard
30781 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30782 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30784 See the next subsection for an example.
30787 \begin_layout Subsection
30789 \begin_inset Index idx
30792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30793 Index ! Entry layout
30801 \begin_layout Standard
30802 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30803 \begin_inset Index idx
30806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30809 This is an italic dummy entry
30814 You can also format the page number using the character
30815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30822 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30823 -command without a backslash.
30824 We can write for example
30827 \begin_layout Standard
30830 italic page number:|textit
30833 \begin_layout Standard
30834 to get the page number in italic.
30835 \begin_inset Index idx
30838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30839 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30844 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30845 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30863 \begin_inset space ~
30869 Have a look at section
30870 \begin_inset space ~
30874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30876 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30880 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30884 \begin_layout Standard
30885 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30893 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30897 to generate the index, see section
30898 \begin_inset space ~
30902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30904 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30913 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30918 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30919 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30922 key "latexcompanion"
30935 \begin_layout Standard
30936 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30938 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30939 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30940 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30941 If so, put the following in the preamble
30944 \begin_layout Standard
30956 \begin_layout Standard
30960 \begin_layout Standard
30966 \begin_layout Standard
30967 in the index entry.
30968 \begin_inset Index idx
30971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30972 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30977 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30978 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30979 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30982 \begin_layout Standard
30983 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30984 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30985 a bold font for all index entries.
30986 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30998 documentation for details,
30999 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31001 key "makeindex,xindy"
31009 \begin_layout Subsection
31011 \begin_inset Index idx
31014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31023 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31030 \begin_layout Standard
31031 If the index generation program
31035 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31036 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31040 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31041 distribution, is used.
31045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31050 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31051 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31052 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31053 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31054 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31064 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31066 dialog, see section
31067 \begin_inset space ~
31071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31073 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31078 The available options are listed and explained in
31079 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31081 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31087 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31091 \begin_layout Standard
31092 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31093 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31096 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31097 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31101 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31102 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31105 \begin_layout Subsection
31109 \begin_layout Standard
31110 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31111 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31119 next to the standard index.
31121 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31122 that add this feature.
31129 \begin_inset Index idx
31132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31134 packages ! splitidx
31139 package to generate multiple indexes.
31140 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31146 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31148 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31156 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31157 style, but it also includes
31158 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31159 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31167 \begin_layout Standard
31168 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31169 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31172 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31175 and select the option
31177 Use multiple Indexes
31184 already contains the standard index
31185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31193 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31194 also appear as a heading) to the
31198 input field and press the
31203 The new index now also appears in the list.
31204 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31205 label color to the new index.
31208 \begin_layout Standard
31209 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31219 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31220 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31221 are additional features:
31224 \begin_layout Itemize
31225 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31226 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31229 \begin_layout Itemize
31230 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31231 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31236 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31237 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31238 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31239 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31242 \begin_layout Itemize
31247 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
31248 code in the name of the index.
31251 \begin_layout Section
31252 Nomenclature/Glossary
31253 \begin_inset Index idx
31256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31263 \begin_inset Index idx
31266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31297 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31304 \begin_layout Standard
31305 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31306 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31307 called nomenclature or glossary.
31310 \begin_layout Standard
31311 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31318 \begin_inset Index idx
31321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31329 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31331 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31338 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31342 \begin_layout Standard
31343 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31344 and then use the menu
31346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31352 \begin_inset space ~
31357 or the toolbar button
31360 arg "nomencl-insert"
31365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31376 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31379 \begin_layout Standard
31380 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31381 The first is the term or
31385 that you wish to define.
31390 of the term or symbol.
31393 \begin_layout Standard
31394 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31402 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31403 code for nomenclature entries the option
31407 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31415 \begin_layout Subsection
31416 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31417 \begin_inset Index idx
31420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31421 Nomenclature ! Layout
31429 \begin_layout Standard
31430 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31434 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31441 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31449 \begin_inset Newline newline
31457 \begin_inset Newline newline
31463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31470 character starts/ends the formula.
31471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31472 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31484 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31495 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31496 syntax is given in section
31497 \begin_inset space ~
31501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31503 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31510 \begin_layout Standard
31514 \begin_inset space ~
31519 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31521 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31526 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31533 in this document is:
31534 \begin_inset Newline newline
31539 dummy entry for the character
31544 \begin_inset Newline newline
31556 \begin_inset space ~
31566 font use the command
31595 \begin_layout Standard
31596 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31597 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31601 \begin_inset space \space{}
31605 \begin_inset Newline newline
31621 \begin_inset Newline newline
31624 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31625 This command will make the font of all symbols
31632 \begin_inset space ~
31640 \begin_layout Standard
31641 If the characters |
31642 \begin_inset space \space{}
31646 \begin_inset space \space{}
31650 \begin_inset space \space{}
31654 \begin_inset space \space{}
31658 \begin_inset space \space{}
31661 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31662 code they need to be escaped
31663 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31664 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31665 LatexCommand nomenclature
31666 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31667 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31675 \begin_layout Subsection
31676 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31677 \begin_inset Index idx
31680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31681 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31689 \begin_layout Standard
31690 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31691 -code of the symbol
31693 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31695 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31698 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31699 LatexCommand nomenclature
31701 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31709 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31713 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31714 LatexCommand nomenclature
31717 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31723 They will be sorted by
31724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31750 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31753 will be sorted before the
31757 since the character
31758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31765 is considered in sorting.
31768 \begin_layout Standard
31769 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31772 \begin_inset space ~
31777 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31778 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31780 For the example given, you can insert
31784 in this field for the
31785 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31792 will be located before
31793 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31799 \begin_layout Standard
31800 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31805 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31815 \begin_layout Subsection
31816 Nomenclature Options
31817 \begin_inset Index idx
31820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31821 Nomenclature ! Options
31827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31829 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31836 \begin_layout Standard
31841 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31842 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31845 \begin_layout Description
31846 refeq Appends the phrase
31847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31862 to every nomenclature entry, where
31868 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31871 \begin_layout Description
31872 refpage Appends the phrase
31873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31888 to every nomenclature entry, where
31894 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31897 \begin_layout Description
31898 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31901 \begin_layout Standard
31902 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31903 class options list in the
31905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31909 In this document the options
31916 \begin_layout Standard
31917 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31923 \begin_layout Standard
31924 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31925 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31930 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31933 \begin_layout Description
31943 \begin_layout Description
31946 nomrefpage Like the
31953 \begin_layout Description
31956 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31965 \begin_layout Description
31969 \begin_inset space ~
31975 \begin_inset space ~
31980 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31983 \begin_layout Standard
31985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31992 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31993 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31997 \begin_layout Standard
32006 \begin_inset Newline newline
32012 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32016 \begin_inset space ~
32028 unskip, see equation
32031 \begin_inset Newline newline
32038 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32039 \begin_inset Newline newline
32045 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32049 \begin_inset space ~
32066 \begin_layout Standard
32067 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32070 \begin_inset space ~
32075 in the document settings under
32078 \begin_inset space ~
32086 \begin_layout Standard
32094 \begin_inset Newline newline
32098 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32102 \begin_inset space ~
32114 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
32116 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
32117 \begin_inset Newline newline
32124 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32125 \begin_inset Newline newline
32129 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32133 \begin_inset space ~
32145 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
32150 \begin_layout Subsection
32151 Printing the Nomenclature
32152 \begin_inset Index idx
32155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32156 Nomenclature ! Printing
32164 \begin_layout Standard
32165 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32168 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32184 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32185 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32186 You can choose between these settings:
32189 \begin_layout Description
32190 Default a space of 1
32191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32197 \begin_layout Description
32199 \begin_inset space ~
32203 \begin_inset space ~
32206 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
32209 \begin_layout Description
32210 Custom custom space
32213 \begin_layout Standard
32214 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32223 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32231 For example, in order to change the name to
32235 , add the following line to the preamble:
32238 \begin_layout Standard
32251 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
32254 \begin_layout Standard
32255 When you are using another document language than English, replace
32256 \begin_inset Newline newline
32271 , where *** is the name of the language used.
32274 \begin_layout Subsection
32275 Nomenclature Program
32276 \begin_inset Index idx
32279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32280 Nomenclature ! Program
32286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32288 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32295 \begin_layout Standard
32301 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32302 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32304 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32309 by adding options, see section
32310 \begin_inset space ~
32314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32316 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32321 The available options are listed and explained in
32322 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32324 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32332 \begin_layout Section
32334 \begin_inset Index idx
32337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32344 \begin_inset Index idx
32347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32348 Document ! Branches
32354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32356 name "sec:Branches"
32363 \begin_layout Standard
32364 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32365 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32366 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32367 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32370 \begin_layout Standard
32371 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32372 allows you to put text into branches.
32373 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32374 To create a branch, either select the menu
32376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32377 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32380 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32382 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32389 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32390 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32391 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32392 and whether the name of the branch should
32393 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32394 (see below for an example).
32395 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32396 to the name of the other) and to add
32397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32409 \begin_inset space ~
32412 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32413 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32416 \begin_layout Standard
32417 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32418 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32423 where you can choose a branch.
32424 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32428 \begin_layout Standard
32429 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32430 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32433 \begin_layout Standard
32434 \begin_inset Branch Question
32438 \begin_layout Standard
32443 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32451 \begin_layout Standard
32452 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32456 \begin_layout Standard
32461 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32469 \begin_layout Standard
32476 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32477 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32480 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32481 Consider for example a file
32482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32489 which has the above branches.
32491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32498 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32522 branch were inactive,
32523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32538 branch was active, likewise
32539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32554 branch was active, and
32555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32558 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32562 if both branches were active.
32563 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32564 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32570 \begin_layout Standard
32571 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32577 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32578 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32582 \begin_inset space ~
32590 \begin_layout Standard
32591 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32595 \begin_layout Standard
32601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32608 branch is deactivated.
32614 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32620 \begin_layout Standard
32621 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32622 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32623 definitions for each branch.
32624 For example you can define for the question branch
32628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32629 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32630 -syntax, see section
32631 \begin_inset space ~
32635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32637 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32649 \begin_layout Standard
32659 \begin_layout Standard
32669 \begin_layout Standard
32670 and for the answer branch
32673 \begin_layout Standard
32683 \begin_layout Standard
32693 \begin_layout Standard
32694 \begin_inset Branch Question
32698 \begin_layout Standard
32702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32730 \begin_layout Standard
32731 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32735 \begin_layout Standard
32739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32767 \begin_layout Standard
32768 Now it is possible to use the
32772 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32779 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32782 commands to obtain conditional output.
32783 Here is an example formula where only the
32790 \begin_inset Formula
32792 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32800 \begin_layout Standard
32801 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32809 \begin_layout Standard
32810 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32816 \begin_inset space \space{}
32819 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32821 For this advanced usage, see the
32827 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32832 \begin_layout Section
32834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32836 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32841 \begin_inset Index idx
32844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32853 \begin_layout Standard
32856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32857 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32860 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32862 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32868 \begin_inset Index idx
32871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32873 packages ! hyperref
32878 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32879 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32880 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32881 part of the document.
32885 \begin_layout Standard
32886 The header information in the dialog tab
32890 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32891 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32892 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32893 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32897 \begin_inset space ~
32901 \begin_inset space ~
32906 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32907 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32908 and author entries.
32912 \begin_inset space ~
32916 \begin_inset space ~
32920 \begin_inset space ~
32925 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32928 \begin_layout Standard
32929 You can specify in the dialog tab
32933 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32938 \begin_inset space ~
32942 \begin_inset space ~
32946 \begin_inset space ~
32951 option allows long links to be split;
32954 \begin_inset space ~
32958 \begin_inset space ~
32962 \begin_inset space ~
32970 \begin_inset space ~
32975 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32978 \begin_inset space ~
32983 colors the different links.
32984 The default colors are:
32987 \begin_layout Labeling
32988 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32993 for hyperlinks and URLs
32996 \begin_layout Labeling
32997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33005 \begin_layout Labeling
33006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33014 \begin_layout Standard
33015 but you can change these in the field
33020 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33023 \begin_layout Standard
33026 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33029 \begin_layout Standard
33034 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33035 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33036 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33039 \begin_layout Standard
33044 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33045 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33046 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33056 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33057 when opening the PDF.
33059 \begin_inset space ~
33062 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33063 \begin_inset space ~
33066 1 will only display the sections.
33069 \begin_layout Standard
33070 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33071 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33077 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33078 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33088 \begin_layout Section
33090 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33094 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33101 \begin_layout Subsection
33104 \begin_inset Index idx
33107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33117 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
33124 \begin_layout Standard
33125 As \SpecialChar LyX
33126 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
33127 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
33128 commands and constructs,
33131 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
33132 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
33133 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
33134 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33135 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
33136 cannot support all packages and
33140 \begin_layout Standard
33141 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
33142 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
33143 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
33147 Code box is created by the menu
33149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33151 \begin_inset space ~
33156 or by the toolbar button
33169 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33177 \begin_layout Standard
33178 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33180 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33182 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
33186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33187 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
33192 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33199 , you can write the command part
33205 in a \SpecialChar TeX
33206 Code box before the word and the closing brace
33210 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
33211 Code box behind the word.
33212 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
33213 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
33217 \begin_layout Standard
33218 \begin_inset Graphics
33219 filename clipart/ERT.png
33227 \begin_layout Standard
33231 \begin_layout Standard
33232 This is a line with a
33236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33259 \begin_layout Standard
33260 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33268 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33269 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33270 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33271 know that the command is finished.
33279 \begin_layout Subsection
33280 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33282 \begin_inset Argument 1
33285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33286 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33293 \begin_inset Index idx
33296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33306 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33313 \begin_layout Standard
33314 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33315 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33316 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33317 uses in the background.
33318 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33319 is based on commands, you can
33320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33328 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33329 any time if you know the right commands.
33330 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33331 is the end of the day.
33332 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33333 all caption labels bold.
33334 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33336 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33340 \begin_layout Standard
33341 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33343 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33345 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33348 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33358 \begin_layout Standard
33359 As result you find that the package
33364 \begin_inset Index idx
33367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33375 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33377 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33380 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33384 \begin_inset space ~
33392 \begin_layout Standard
33397 usepackage[options]{package name}
33400 \begin_layout Standard
33401 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33402 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33403 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33404 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33407 \begin_layout Standard
33408 In your case the package name is
33413 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33418 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33419 So you add the command
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33427 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33430 \begin_layout Standard
33431 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33436 For more commands provided by the
33440 package, have a look at its documentation,
33441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33456 \begin_layout Standard
33457 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33459 For example if you use a
33463 class, you don't need the package
33467 , you can instead write
33470 \begin_layout Standard
33475 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33480 \begin_layout Standard
33481 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33482 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33483 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33490 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33493 \begin_layout Standard
33494 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33495 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33497 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33498 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33499 Code box as described in the previous
33503 \begin_layout Standard
33504 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33505 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33510 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33518 \begin_layout Standard
33519 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33525 \begin_layout Standard
33529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33539 \begin_inset Note Note
33542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33543 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33551 \begin_layout Left Header
33552 \begin_inset Argument 1
33555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33575 \begin_inset Note Note
33578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33579 defines the header line as described below
33587 \begin_layout Center Header
33588 \begin_inset Argument 1
33591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33600 \begin_layout Right Header
33601 \begin_inset Argument 1
33604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33625 \begin_layout Left Footer
33626 \begin_inset Argument 1
33629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33650 \begin_layout Center Footer
33651 \begin_inset Argument 1
33654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33666 \begin_inset Newline newline
33670 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33676 \begin_layout Right Footer
33677 \begin_inset Argument 1
33680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33702 \begin_layout Section
33703 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33706 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33711 \begin_inset Index idx
33714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33715 Document ! Header/Footer line
33721 \begin_inset Index idx
33724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33733 \begin_layout Standard
33734 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33738 \begin_inset space ~
33749 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33755 \begin_inset space ~
33761 As a second step add in the menu
33763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33764 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33773 Custom Header/Footerlines
33776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33780 This module offers the following 6
33781 \begin_inset space ~
33787 \begin_layout Description
33789 \begin_inset space ~
33793 \begin_inset space ~
33797 \begin_inset space ~
33801 \begin_inset space ~
33805 \begin_inset space ~
33811 \begin_layout Description
33813 \begin_inset space ~
33817 \begin_inset space ~
33821 \begin_inset space ~
33825 \begin_inset space ~
33829 \begin_inset space ~
33835 \begin_layout Standard
33836 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33837 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33840 \begin_layout Standard
33841 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33842 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33844 \begin_inset space ~
33848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33850 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33854 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33857 \begin_layout Standard
33858 \begin_inset Float figure
33864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33867 \begin_inset Tabular
33868 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33869 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33870 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33871 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33872 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33874 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33892 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33903 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33921 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33932 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33936 The normal text on the page goes here.
33937 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33939 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33940 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33945 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33954 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33965 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33983 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33994 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34012 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34035 name "fig:Page-layout"
34039 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34052 \begin_layout Standard
34053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34061 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34065 \begin_inset space ~
34070 is set to “Default”.
34071 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34080 \begin_layout Subsection
34084 \begin_layout Standard
34085 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34086 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34087 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34088 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34090 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34092 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34095 \begin_layout Standard
34096 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34097 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
34101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34111 \begin_layout Description
34114 thepage prints the current page number
34117 \begin_layout Description
34120 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
34123 \begin_layout Description
34126 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
34129 \begin_layout Description
34132 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
34133 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
34136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34140 \begin_inset Quotes prd
34143 because it usually goes in a left header.
34146 \begin_layout Description
34149 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
34150 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
34152 It is normally used in the right header.
34155 \begin_layout Subsection
34156 Default header/footer
34159 \begin_layout Standard
34160 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34161 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34162 footer has the page number.
34163 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34164 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34165 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34168 \begin_inset space ~
34176 \begin_layout Subsection
34180 \begin_layout Standard
34181 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34182 Some pages are different.
34183 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34184 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
34185 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
34186 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
34187 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
34190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34191 Header and footer decoration line
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34195 By default, you get a 0.4
34196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34199 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
34200 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
34212 in the following way:
34215 \begin_layout Standard
34222 headrulewidth}{thickness}
34225 \begin_layout Standard
34226 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34239 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34246 \begin_layout Standard
34247 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34249 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34250 \begin_inset space ~
34254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34265 Several header/footer lines
34268 \begin_layout Standard
34269 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34270 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34271 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34273 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34289 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34291 \begin_inset space ~
34299 \begin_layout Standard
34306 headheight}{height}
34309 \begin_layout Standard
34314 is a size in standard units (e.
34315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34319 \begin_inset space \space{}
34327 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34328 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34329 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34330 logfile with the menu
34332 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34334 \begin_inset space ~
34342 \begin_inset space ~
34347 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34352 \begin_inset Index idx
34355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34357 packages ! fancyhdr
34363 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34364 for your header/footer.
34367 \begin_layout Subsection
34371 \begin_layout Standard
34372 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34373 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34374 This example consists of the following definition:
34377 \begin_layout Description
34379 \begin_inset space ~
34388 , empty optional argument
34391 \begin_layout Description
34393 \begin_inset space ~
34396 Header empty, empty optional argument
34399 \begin_layout Description
34401 \begin_inset space ~
34410 in the optional argument
34413 \begin_layout Description
34415 \begin_inset space ~
34424 in the optional argument
34427 \begin_layout Description
34429 \begin_inset space ~
34442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34446 \begin_inset Newline newline
34450 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34457 in the optional argument
34460 \begin_layout Description
34462 \begin_inset space ~
34471 , empty optional argument
34474 \begin_layout Description
34477 headrulewidth set to 2
34478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34484 \begin_layout Standard
34485 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34486 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34492 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34502 \begin_layout Standard
34503 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34509 \begin_layout Standard
34513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34517 pagestyle{headings}
34523 \begin_inset Note Note
34526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34527 switches back to page style with the default headings
34535 \begin_layout Section
34536 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34539 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34544 \begin_inset Index idx
34547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34554 \begin_inset Index idx
34557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34566 \begin_layout Standard
34568 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34569 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34570 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34573 \begin_layout Subsection
34577 \begin_layout Standard
34578 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34584 \begin_inset Index idx
34587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34589 packages ! preview-latex
34594 (on some systems named simply
34599 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34601 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34608 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34610 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34618 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34619 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34620 -package are automatically
34621 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34625 \begin_layout Subsection
34629 \begin_layout Standard
34630 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34631 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34633 activate the option
34636 \begin_inset space ~
34643 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34649 \begin_inset space ~
34653 \begin_inset space ~
34656 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34663 \begin_inset space ~
34676 \begin_inset space ~
34681 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34684 \begin_layout Standard
34685 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34690 \begin_inset space ~
34698 \begin_inset space ~
34706 \begin_layout Standard
34707 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34708 and when you finish
34712 \begin_layout Standard
34713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34721 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34722 generated by activating the option
34725 \begin_inset space ~
34731 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34739 \begin_layout Subsection
34740 Selected document parts
34743 \begin_layout Standard
34744 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34745 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34746 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34747 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34749 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34755 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34756 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34757 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34760 \begin_layout Standard
34761 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34768 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34780 is explained in section
34782 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34787 \begin_inset space ~
34797 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34798 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34799 the final rotated boxes,
34800 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34801 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34803 Here is the result:
34806 \begin_layout Standard
34807 \begin_inset Preview
34809 \begin_layout Standard
34814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34818 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34824 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34834 height_special "totalheight"
34839 backgroundcolor "none"
34842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34867 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34873 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34895 \begin_layout Standard
34896 Previewing works also for colors.
34897 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34916 is explained in section
34923 \begin_inset space ~
34936 \begin_layout Standard
34937 \begin_inset Preview
34939 \begin_layout Standard
34943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34962 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34967 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34986 \begin_layout Standard
34987 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34993 \begin_layout Standard
34994 If \SpecialChar LyX
34995 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34996 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34997 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34998 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34999 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35000 the \SpecialChar TeX
35002 If \SpecialChar LyX
35003 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35004 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35006 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35007 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35008 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35011 \begin_layout Subsection
35016 \begin_layout Standard
35017 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35018 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35021 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35023 \begin_inset space ~
35028 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35030 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35032 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35033 's main window, then only this selection
35034 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35035 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35036 the source view window.
35041 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35042 ; but note that if you have
35043 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35045 not just the one which is open at the time.
35048 \begin_layout Section
35049 Advanced Find and Replace
35050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35052 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35057 \begin_inset Index idx
35060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35067 \begin_inset Index idx
35070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35079 \begin_layout Subsection
35083 \begin_layout Standard
35084 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35085 allows for searching of complex,
35086 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35088 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35089 The key-features are:
35092 \begin_layout Itemize
35093 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35094 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35095 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35099 \begin_layout Itemize
35100 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
35101 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
35102 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
35103 a section heading will only be found within section headings
35106 \begin_layout Itemize
35107 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
35108 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
35109 outside of mathematics environments
35112 \begin_layout Itemize
35113 Search may be widened to a specific
35118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35122 \begin_inset space ~
35125 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
35126 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
35133 \begin_layout Itemize
35134 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
35135 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
35136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35140 \begin_inset space ~
35143 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
35146 \begin_layout Subsection
35150 \begin_layout Standard
35151 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
35153 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35166 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35169 ) or the toolbar button
35172 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35178 Advanced Find and Replace
35183 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35187 \begin_layout Standard
35193 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
35197 \begin_inset space ~
35202 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
35205 arg "paragraph-break"
35209 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
35210 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
35214 arg "paragraph-break"
35217 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
35221 searches backwards.
35224 \begin_layout Standard
35228 \begin_inset space ~
35233 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35242 \begin_inset space ~
35247 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35250 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35251 Searching for mathematics
35254 \begin_layout Standard
35255 Mathematical formulas, such as
35256 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35259 or something more complex like
35260 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35263 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35268 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35269 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35270 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35271 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35281 \begin_layout Standard
35282 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35283 This is done by switching to the
35287 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35292 This way, entering in the
35299 \begin_layout Itemize
35300 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35301 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35304 \begin_layout Itemize
35305 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35306 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35309 \begin_layout Itemize
35310 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35311 of it only within section headings.
35312 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35313 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35317 \begin_layout Itemize
35318 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35319 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35326 \begin_layout Standard
35327 The entries made in the
35331 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35340 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35344 button or alternatively press
35347 arg "paragraph-break"
35354 while the cursor is in the
35357 \begin_inset space ~
35365 \begin_layout Standard
35366 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35368 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35372 \begin_layout Itemize
35373 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35374 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35382 with its typewriter version
35383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35397 \begin_layout Itemize
35398 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35404 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35416 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35423 (you may want to enable the
35426 \begin_inset space ~
35434 \begin_inset space ~
35439 options and disable the
35447 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35455 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35456 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35460 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35463 , or occurrences of
35464 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35468 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35474 \begin_layout Subsection
35478 \begin_layout Standard
35479 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35484 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35486 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35488 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35498 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35504 This is done with the context menu
35506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35507 Insert Regular Expression
35509 while the cursor is in the
35514 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35515 expression matching rules
35519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35520 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35527 \begin_inset space ~
35530 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35531 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35537 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35538 same text in the document.
35539 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35540 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35543 \begin_layout Enumerate
35544 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35549 editor the fraction
35550 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35554 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35557 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35558 fractions with the given denominator.
35561 \begin_layout Enumerate
35562 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35574 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35579 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35580 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35581 Also, by inserting a
35582 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35585 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35586 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35589 \begin_layout Standard
35590 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35591 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35592 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35595 , and referring back to them through
35596 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35600 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35604 For example, try searching with the regexp
35605 \begin_inset Newline newline
35608 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35611 \begin_inset Newline newline
35614 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35617 \begin_layout Standard
35618 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35622 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35630 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35631 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35632 sub-expressions is absolute.
35634 \begin_inset space ~
35638 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35641 always refers to the first occurrence of
35642 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35645 in all entered regexps.
35653 \begin_layout Section
35655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35657 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35662 \begin_inset Index idx
35665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35674 \begin_layout Standard
35676 has a built-in spell checker.
35679 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35686 key or the toolbar button
35689 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35692 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35693 beginning of the currently selected text.
35694 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35695 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35696 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35697 scrolled so that it is visible.
35698 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35699 n, if any could be found.
35700 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35704 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35705 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35708 \begin_layout Standard
35709 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35712 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35716 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35717 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35719 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35720 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35723 \begin_inset space ~
35731 arg "dialog-show character"
35734 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35736 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35739 \begin_layout Standard
35740 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35741 can be downloaded from here:
35742 \begin_inset Newline newline
35746 \begin_inset Flex URL
35749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35751 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35757 \begin_inset Newline newline
35761 \begin_inset space ~
35764 files for each language.
35765 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35766 \begin_inset space ~
35769 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35770 's installation subfolder
35778 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35780 \begin_inset Newline newline
35783 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35784 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35785 but in most cases these are
35801 is the language code.
35804 \begin_layout Subsection
35808 \begin_layout Standard
35811 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35812 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35814 \begin_inset space ~
35817 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35820 you can set the following things:
35823 \begin_layout Description
35825 \begin_inset space ~
35828 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35829 should use for spell checking.
35830 Depending on your platform,
35840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35841 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35842 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35857 \begin_inset space ~
35860 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35863 \begin_layout Description
35865 \begin_inset space ~
35868 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35869 will always use the given language
35870 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35873 \begin_layout Description
35875 \begin_inset space ~
35878 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35884 \begin_inset space \space{}
35888 This should normally not be needed.
35891 \begin_layout Description
35893 \begin_inset space ~
35897 \begin_inset space ~
35900 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35912 \begin_layout Description
35914 \begin_inset space ~
35917 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35918 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35919 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35920 appear in a context menu.
35921 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35925 \begin_layout Description
35927 \begin_inset space ~
35931 \begin_inset space ~
35935 \begin_inset space ~
35938 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35942 \begin_layout Section
35944 \begin_inset Index idx
35947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35956 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35963 \begin_layout Standard
35965 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35966 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35976 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35978 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35988 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35990 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35991 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35992 which are available for many languages.
35995 \begin_layout Standard
35996 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35997 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36001 \begin_layout Subsection
36002 Setting up the thesaurus
36005 \begin_layout Standard
36014 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36018 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36023 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36029 \begin_inset space ~
36037 For instance, the US English files are named:
36040 \begin_layout Itemize
36044 \begin_layout Itemize
36048 \begin_layout Standard
36057 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36058 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36061 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36062 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36063 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36065 \begin_inset space ~
36070 ) to the path where they are installed.
36074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36075 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36076 ies, typical locations are
36082 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36086 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36090 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36093 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36099 LibreOffice-<Version>
36106 On the Mac, the default location is
36108 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
36109 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36110 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
36111 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
36112 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36113 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36121 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
36122 during the \SpecialChar LyX
36123 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
36127 \begin_layout Standard
36128 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
36129 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
36131 \begin_inset Newline newline
36135 \begin_inset Flex URL
36138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36140 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
36148 \begin_layout Standard
36149 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
36150 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
36152 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36153 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36154 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36161 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36163 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36164 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36168 \begin_layout Standard
36169 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36171 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36174 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36180 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36183 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36184 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
36186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36193 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36194 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36196 \begin_inset space ~
36201 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
36204 \begin_layout Subsection
36205 Using the thesaurus
36208 \begin_layout Standard
36209 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
36211 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36214 or the toolbar button
36217 arg "thesaurus-entry"
36220 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
36222 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
36224 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
36225 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
36226 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36235 ), related terms (such as
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36247 ), compounds (such as
36250 \begin_inset space ~
36259 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36268 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36271 \begin_layout Standard
36272 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36273 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36277 \begin_layout Standard
36278 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36279 the dictionary, such as the above
36283 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36288 \begin_inset space \space{}
36291 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36292 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36293 For example, looking up the word form
36297 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36302 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36307 \begin_inset space \space{}
36318 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36319 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36320 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36323 \begin_layout Section
36325 \begin_inset Index idx
36328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36335 \begin_inset Index idx
36338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36339 Document ! Change Tracking
36345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36347 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36354 \begin_layout Standard
36355 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36356 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36357 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36358 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36362 \begin_inset space ~
36365 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36367 \begin_inset space ~
36375 \begin_layout Standard
36376 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36390 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36391 You can change the color in
36393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36394 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36400 \begin_inset space ~
36405 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36411 \begin_inset Index idx
36414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36415 Color ! Change tracking
36420 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36421 's status bar when the
36422 cursor is in changed text.
36423 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36426 arg "changes-merge"
36432 \begin_layout Standard
36433 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36435 \begin_inset Index idx
36438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36447 \begin_layout Standard
36448 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36454 \begin_layout Standard
36455 \begin_inset Graphics
36456 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36464 \begin_layout Standard
36465 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36471 \begin_layout Standard
36472 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36475 \begin_layout Standard
36476 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36482 \begin_layout Standard
36483 \begin_inset Tabular
36484 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36485 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36486 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36487 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36497 arg "changes-track"
36505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36513 \begin_inset space ~
36516 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36518 \begin_inset space ~
36527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36536 arg "changes-output"
36544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36550 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36552 \begin_inset space ~
36555 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36557 \begin_inset space ~
36561 \begin_inset space ~
36565 \begin_inset space ~
36574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36595 Jumps to the next change
36601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36610 arg "change-accept"
36618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36624 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36629 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36631 \begin_inset space ~
36640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36649 arg "change-reject"
36657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36663 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36668 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36670 \begin_inset space ~
36679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36688 arg "changes-merge"
36696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36702 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36704 \begin_inset space ~
36707 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36709 \begin_inset space ~
36718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36727 arg "all-changes-accept"
36735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36743 \begin_inset space ~
36746 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36748 \begin_inset space ~
36752 \begin_inset space ~
36761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36770 arg "all-changes-reject"
36778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36786 \begin_inset space ~
36789 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36791 \begin_inset space ~
36795 \begin_inset space ~
36804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36828 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36830 \begin_inset space ~
36839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36862 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36864 \begin_inset space ~
36880 \begin_layout Standard
36881 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36887 \begin_layout Standard
36888 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36908 \begin_layout Standard
36909 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36910 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36911 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36912 the next change after the current cursor position.
36913 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36914 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36915 step to the next change.
36916 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36919 \begin_layout Standard
36920 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36921 to describe a change.
36924 \begin_layout Standard
36925 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36931 \begin_inset Index idx
36934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36942 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36944 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36951 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36955 \begin_layout Section
36956 Comparison of Documents
36957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36959 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36964 \begin_inset Index idx
36967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36968 Comparison of documents
36976 \begin_layout Standard
36977 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36980 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36984 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36985 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36987 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36989 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36993 \begin_inset space ~
36997 \begin_inset space ~
37001 \begin_inset space ~
37010 \begin_inset space ~
37014 \begin_inset space ~
37018 \begin_inset space ~
37022 \begin_inset space ~
37026 \begin_inset space ~
37030 \begin_inset space ~
37035 enables the change tracking option
37038 \begin_inset space ~
37042 \begin_inset space ~
37046 \begin_inset space ~
37051 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37054 \begin_layout Section
37055 International Support
37056 \begin_inset Index idx
37059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37060 International support
37068 \begin_layout Standard
37069 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37070 with any language you want.
37071 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37072 up \SpecialChar LyX
37074 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37076 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
37084 \begin_layout Standard
37085 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37086 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37087 \begin_inset space ~
37091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37093 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37100 \begin_layout Subsection
37102 \begin_inset Index idx
37105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37112 \begin_inset Index idx
37115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37116 Document ! Settings
37122 \begin_inset Index idx
37125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37126 Document ! Language
37134 \begin_layout Standard
37137 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37138 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37141 dialog lets you set
37143 the language, the quote style and character encoding
37148 \begin_layout Standard
37153 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37158 \begin_inset space ~
37163 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37164 For details about the different encoding options see section
37165 \begin_inset space ~
37169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37171 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37178 \begin_layout Subsection
37179 Keyboard mapping configuration
37180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37182 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
37189 \begin_layout Standard
37190 If you have for example a U.
37191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37194 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
37195 can use an alternate keymap.
37196 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
37201 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37202 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37203 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
37206 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
37207 \begin_inset space ~
37211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37213 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
37218 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
37219 which one you want to use.
37222 \begin_layout Standard
37223 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
37224 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
37225 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
37226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37229 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37230 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37231 one to support the characters you want.
37232 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37239 \begin_layout Chapter
37242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37244 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37251 \begin_layout Standard
37252 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37253 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37254 topic inside the user's guide.
37257 \begin_layout Section
37259 \begin_inset Index idx
37262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37271 \begin_layout Standard
37276 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37279 \begin_layout Subsection
37283 \begin_layout Standard
37284 Creates a new document.
37287 \begin_layout Subsection
37291 \begin_layout Standard
37292 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37293 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37294 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37297 \begin_layout Subsection
37301 \begin_layout Standard
37305 \begin_layout Subsection
37309 \begin_layout Standard
37310 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37311 Click there on a file to open it.
37314 \begin_layout Subsection
37318 \begin_layout Standard
37319 Closes the current document.
37322 \begin_layout Subsection
37326 \begin_layout Standard
37327 Closes all opened documents.
37330 \begin_layout Subsection
37334 \begin_layout Standard
37335 Saves the actual document.
37338 \begin_layout Subsection
37342 \begin_layout Standard
37343 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37346 \begin_layout Subsection
37350 \begin_layout Standard
37351 Saves all opened documents.
37354 \begin_layout Subsection
37358 \begin_layout Standard
37359 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37362 \begin_layout Subsection
37366 \begin_layout Standard
37367 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37368 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37369 It is described in the section
37371 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37376 Additional Features
37381 \begin_layout Subsection
37385 \begin_layout Standard
37386 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37387 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37389 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37390 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37394 \begin_layout Standard
37395 When using the menu entry
37398 \begin_inset space ~
37403 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37407 \begin_inset space ~
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37420 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37421 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37424 \begin_layout Subsection
37426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37428 name "subsec:Export"
37435 \begin_layout Standard
37436 You can export your document to various file formats.
37437 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37439 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37440 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37441 during its configuration.
37444 \begin_layout Standard
37445 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37447 \begin_inset space ~
37451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37453 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37460 \begin_layout Description
37466 \begin_inset space ~
37469 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37471 \begin_inset space ~
37474 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37475 \begin_inset Newline newline
37478 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37479 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37483 \begin_layout Description
37484 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37490 \begin_layout Description
37492 \begin_inset space ~
37495 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37501 \begin_layout Description
37502 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37503 's native DVI-format.
37504 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37505 files paths or file names in your document.
37507 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37514 \begin_layout Description
37515 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37516 in files paths or file names
37519 \begin_layout Description
37521 \begin_inset space ~
37528 ) DVI-format using the program
37530 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37533 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37537 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37545 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37553 \begin_layout Description
37555 \begin_inset space ~
37558 (cropped) the same as
37562 but with cropped page margins.
37565 \begin_layout Description
37567 \begin_inset space ~
37570 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37574 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37579 \begin_layout Description
37583 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37591 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37599 \begin_layout Description
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37605 \begin_inset space ~
37608 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37612 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37620 \begin_layout Description
37624 \begin_inset space ~
37633 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37634 source that is compilable with the program
37636 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37640 \begin_layout Description
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37649 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37650 source, additionally all images used in the document
37651 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37655 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37658 \begin_layout Description
37662 \begin_inset space ~
37667 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37668 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37669 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37677 \begin_layout Description
37681 \begin_inset space ~
37690 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37691 source that is compilable with the program
37697 \begin_layout Description
37699 \begin_inset space ~
37703 \begin_inset space ~
37710 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37711 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37717 \begin_layout Description
37719 \begin_inset space ~
37722 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37723 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37729 \begin_inset space \space{}
37734 \begin_inset space ~
37738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37753 represent the version number)
37756 \begin_layout Description
37758 \begin_inset space ~
37762 \begin_inset space ~
37765 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37766 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37767 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37771 \begin_layout Description
37772 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37773 's internal XHTML engine
37776 \begin_layout Description
37778 \begin_inset space ~
37782 \begin_inset space ~
37786 \begin_inset space ~
37790 \begin_inset space ~
37793 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37798 For the conversion the program
37807 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37810 \begin_layout Description
37811 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37816 \begin_layout Description
37818 \begin_inset space ~
37821 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37823 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37826 For the conversion the program
37835 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37838 \begin_layout Description
37840 \begin_inset space ~
37843 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37844 For the conversion the program
37853 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37856 \begin_layout Description
37858 \begin_inset space ~
37861 (cropped) the same as
37864 \begin_inset space ~
37869 but with cropped page margins
37872 \begin_layout Description
37876 \begin_inset space ~
37881 PDF-format using the program
37885 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37888 \begin_layout Description
37892 \begin_inset space ~
37896 \begin_inset space ~
37904 \begin_inset space ~
37909 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37914 \begin_inset space \space{}
37917 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37921 \begin_layout Description
37925 \begin_inset space ~
37930 PDF-format using the program
37932 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37935 , produces PDF-files directly
37938 \begin_layout Description
37942 \begin_inset space ~
37947 PDF-format using the program
37951 , produces PDF-files directly
37954 \begin_layout Description
37958 \begin_inset space ~
37963 PDF-format using the program
37967 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37970 \begin_layout Description
37974 \begin_inset space ~
37979 PDF-format using the program
37984 , produces PDF-files directly
37987 \begin_layout Description
37991 \begin_inset space ~
37999 \begin_layout Description
38003 \begin_inset space ~
38007 \begin_inset space ~
38012 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38013 and then exported as text using the program
38018 \begin_layout Description
38023 PostScript format using the program
38031 options see section
38032 \begin_inset space ~
38036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38038 reference "subsec:General-output"
38045 \begin_layout Description
38046 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38047 source and also code in the statistical programming
38061 it is possible to use
38065 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38069 \begin_layout Standard
38070 If one of the menu entries
38077 \begin_inset space ~
38086 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38088 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38090 \begin_inset space ~
38094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38096 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38101 \begin_inset Index idx
38104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38105 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38114 \begin_layout Subsection
38118 \begin_layout Standard
38119 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
38120 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
38123 \begin_inset space ~
38127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38129 reference "sec:Paths"
38134 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
38143 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
38144 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
38145 's preferences as described in section
38146 \begin_inset space ~
38150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38152 reference "subsec:Converters"
38159 \begin_layout Subsection
38160 New and Close Window
38163 \begin_layout Standard
38164 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38168 \begin_layout Subsection
38172 \begin_layout Standard
38173 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38176 \begin_layout Section
38178 \begin_inset Index idx
38181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38190 \begin_layout Subsection
38194 \begin_layout Standard
38195 Described in section
38196 \begin_inset space ~
38200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38202 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
38209 \begin_layout Subsection
38210 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
38213 \begin_layout Standard
38214 Described in section
38215 \begin_inset space ~
38219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38221 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38228 \begin_layout Subsection
38232 \begin_layout Standard
38233 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38234 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38237 \begin_layout Subsection
38241 \begin_layout Standard
38242 Selects the whole document.
38245 \begin_layout Subsection
38246 Find & Replace (Quick)
38249 \begin_layout Standard
38250 Described in section
38251 \begin_inset space ~
38255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38257 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38264 \begin_layout Subsection
38265 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38268 \begin_layout Standard
38269 Described in section
38270 \begin_inset space ~
38274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38276 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38283 \begin_layout Subsection
38284 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38287 \begin_layout Standard
38288 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38292 \begin_layout Subsection
38296 \begin_layout Standard
38298 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595818
38299 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
38304 \begin_layout Enumerate
38306 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595876
38307 Customize text properties by means of the
38313 Customized\SpecialChar ldots
38317 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595580
38319 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595580
38322 escribed in section
38323 \begin_inset space ~
38327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38329 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38334 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595582
38336 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595616
38338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595617
38342 \begin_layout Enumerate
38344 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595704
38345 Change the casing of selected text (
38360 \begin_layout Enumerate
38362 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599421
38363 Select custom character styles if provided by the document class or a module
38364 (in the case of this document:
38381 \begin_inset space ~
38385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38387 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
38396 \begin_layout Subsection
38398 \begin_inset Index idx
38401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38402 Paragraph ! Settings
38410 \begin_layout Standard
38411 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38412 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38416 \begin_layout Standard
38417 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38418 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38425 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38427 \begin_inset space ~
38435 \begin_layout Subsection
38436 Table and Rows & Columns
38439 \begin_layout Standard
38440 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38441 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38442 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38445 \begin_layout Subsection
38449 \begin_layout Standard
38450 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38451 It will dissolve this inset.
38452 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38456 \begin_layout Subsection
38460 \begin_layout Standard
38461 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38462 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38465 \begin_layout Subsection
38466 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38469 \begin_layout Standard
38470 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38472 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38473 \begin_inset space ~
38477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38479 reference "sec:Nesting"
38484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38486 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38493 \begin_layout Section
38495 \begin_inset Index idx
38498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38507 \begin_layout Standard
38508 At the bottom of the
38512 menu the opened documents are listed.
38515 \begin_layout Subsection
38516 Open/Close all Insets
38519 \begin_layout Standard
38520 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38523 \begin_layout Subsection
38524 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38527 \begin_layout Standard
38528 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38531 \begin_layout Standard
38532 Math macros are described in the
38539 \begin_layout Subsection
38543 \begin_layout Standard
38544 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38545 \begin_inset space ~
38549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38551 reference "sec:Navigating"
38556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38558 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38565 \begin_layout Subsection
38569 \begin_layout Standard
38570 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38572 \begin_inset space ~
38576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38578 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38585 \begin_layout Subsection
38589 \begin_layout Standard
38590 Opens a window showing console messages.
38591 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38596 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38597 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38598 is processing the document.
38601 \begin_layout Subsection
38603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38605 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38610 \begin_inset Index idx
38613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38622 \begin_layout Standard
38623 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38625 All toolbars and the
38628 \begin_inset space ~
38633 can be turned on and off.
38638 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38650 \begin_inset space ~
38662 \begin_inset space ~
38667 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38671 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38678 \begin_layout Standard
38683 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38687 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38688 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38689 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38690 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38691 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38694 \begin_layout Standard
38696 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38697 \begin_inset space ~
38701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38703 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38710 \begin_layout Subsection
38714 \begin_layout Standard
38718 \begin_inset space ~
38722 \begin_inset space ~
38726 \begin_inset space ~
38730 \begin_inset space ~
38734 \begin_inset space ~
38738 \begin_inset space ~
38743 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38744 's main window vertically while
38747 \begin_inset space ~
38751 \begin_inset space ~
38755 \begin_inset space ~
38759 \begin_inset space ~
38763 \begin_inset space ~
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38772 will split it horizontally.
38773 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38774 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38775 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38776 three or more documents at the same time.
38777 To close a split view, use the menu
38780 \begin_inset space ~
38784 \begin_inset space ~
38792 \begin_layout Subsection
38796 \begin_layout Standard
38797 Closes a split view.
38800 \begin_layout Subsection
38804 \begin_layout Standard
38805 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38806 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38807 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38808 's main window fullscreen.
38809 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38810 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38813 \begin_layout Section
38815 \begin_inset Index idx
38818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38827 \begin_layout Subsection
38831 \begin_layout Standard
38832 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38833 \begin_inset space ~
38837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38839 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38850 \begin_layout Subsection
38852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38854 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38861 \begin_layout Standard
38862 Here you can insert the following characters:
38865 \begin_layout Description
38870 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38873 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38874 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38875 -packages you have installed.
38876 You can get a complete display by checking
38879 \begin_inset space ~
38885 \begin_inset Newline newline
38889 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38897 Not all characters will be visible in the
38901 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38902 dialog (see section
38903 \begin_inset space ~
38907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38909 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38913 ) can display every character.
38921 \begin_layout Description
38922 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38926 \begin_layout Description
38928 \begin_inset space ~
38932 \begin_inset space ~
38935 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38936 \begin_inset space ~
38940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38942 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38949 \begin_layout Description
38951 \begin_inset space ~
38954 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38958 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38964 \begin_layout Description
38966 \begin_inset space ~
38969 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38973 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38979 \begin_layout Description
38981 \begin_inset space ~
38984 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38988 \begin_layout Description
38990 \begin_inset space ~
38993 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38997 \begin_layout Description
38999 \begin_inset space ~
39002 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39008 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39014 \begin_layout Description
39016 \begin_inset space ~
39019 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39023 \begin_layout Description
39025 \begin_inset space ~
39029 \begin_inset Index idx
39032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39039 \begin_inset Index idx
39042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39043 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39048 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
39049 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
39051 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39057 \begin_inset Index idx
39060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39068 \begin_inset Newline newline
39071 More information about this feature can be found in the
39077 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
39083 \begin_layout Description
39084 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
39086 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
39087 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
39091 \begin_layout Subsection
39095 \begin_layout Standard
39096 Opens a submenu with the following options:
39099 \begin_layout Description
39100 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
39101 \begin_inset script superscript
39103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 \begin_layout Description
39113 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
39114 \begin_inset script subscript
39116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39125 \begin_layout Description
39127 \begin_inset space ~
39130 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
39131 \begin_inset space ~
39135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39137 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
39144 \begin_layout Description
39146 \begin_inset space ~
39149 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39156 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
39163 \begin_layout Description
39165 \begin_inset space ~
39168 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39175 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
39182 \begin_layout Description
39184 \begin_inset space ~
39187 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
39189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39193 \begin_inset space \space{}
39196 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
39197 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
39203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39206 To insert a fraction use the command
39211 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39215 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
39221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39224 The visible space is hereby the character before the
39231 \begin_layout Description
39233 \begin_inset space ~
39236 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
39237 \begin_inset space ~
39241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39243 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
39250 \begin_layout Description
39252 \begin_inset space ~
39255 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
39256 \begin_inset space ~
39260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39262 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
39269 \begin_layout Description
39271 \begin_inset space ~
39274 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
39275 \begin_inset space ~
39279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39281 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
39288 \begin_layout Description
39289 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
39290 \begin_inset space ~
39294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39296 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39303 \begin_layout Description
39305 \begin_inset space ~
39308 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39309 \begin_inset space ~
39313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39315 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39322 \begin_layout Description
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39327 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39328 \begin_inset space ~
39332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39334 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39341 \begin_layout Description
39343 \begin_inset space ~
39347 \begin_inset space ~
39350 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
39353 \begin_inset space ~
39357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39359 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
39366 for a usage example.
39369 \begin_layout Description
39371 \begin_inset space ~
39375 \begin_inset space ~
39378 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39379 \begin_inset space ~
39383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39385 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39392 \begin_layout Description
39394 \begin_inset space ~
39397 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39398 as described in section
39399 \begin_inset space ~
39403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39405 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39412 \begin_layout Description
39414 \begin_inset space ~
39417 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39424 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39431 \begin_layout Description
39433 \begin_inset space ~
39436 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39437 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39439 \begin_inset space ~
39443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39445 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39452 \begin_layout Description
39454 \begin_inset space ~
39457 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39458 \begin_inset space ~
39462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39464 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39471 \begin_layout Description
39473 \begin_inset space ~
39477 \begin_inset space ~
39480 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39481 \begin_inset space ~
39485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39487 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39494 \begin_layout Subsection
39498 \begin_layout Standard
39499 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39503 \begin_inset space ~
39524 are described in section
39525 \begin_inset space ~
39529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39531 reference "sec:toc"
39540 is described in section
39541 \begin_inset space ~
39545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39547 reference "sec:Index"
39555 is described in section
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39562 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39568 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39571 is described in section
39572 \begin_inset space ~
39576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39578 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39585 \begin_layout Subsection
39589 \begin_layout Standard
39590 To insert floats, as described in section
39591 \begin_inset space ~
39595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39597 reference "sec:Floats"
39601 and in detail the chapter
39608 \begin_inset space ~
39616 \begin_layout Subsection
39620 \begin_layout Standard
39621 To insert notes, described in section
39622 \begin_inset space ~
39626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39628 reference "sec:Notes"
39635 \begin_layout Subsection
39639 \begin_layout Standard
39640 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39642 Branches are described in section
39643 \begin_inset space ~
39647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39649 reference "sec:Branches"
39656 \begin_layout Subsection
39660 \begin_layout Standard
39661 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39662 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39664 An example is the document class
39665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39672 with three custom insets.
39675 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39679 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39685 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39688 \begin_layout Subsection
39690 \begin_inset Index idx
39693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39702 \begin_layout Standard
39703 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39705 For more information see chapter
39707 External Document Parts
39710 \begin_inset space ~
39716 \begin_layout Subsection
39718 \begin_inset Index idx
39721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39730 \begin_layout Standard
39731 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39732 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39739 \begin_inset space ~
39747 \begin_layout Subsection
39751 \begin_layout Standard
39756 dialog as described in section
39757 \begin_inset space ~
39761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39763 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39770 \begin_layout Subsection
39774 \begin_layout Standard
39779 as described in section
39780 \begin_inset space ~
39784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39786 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39793 \begin_layout Subsection
39797 \begin_layout Standard
39802 as described in section
39803 \begin_inset space ~
39807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39809 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39816 \begin_layout Subsection
39818 \begin_inset Index idx
39821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39828 \begin_inset Index idx
39831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39832 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39840 \begin_layout Standard
39841 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39842 Floats are described in section
39843 \begin_inset space ~
39847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39849 reference "sec:Floats"
39853 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39855 Multi-page Captions
39860 \begin_inset space ~
39868 \begin_layout Subsection
39872 \begin_layout Standard
39873 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39874 \begin_inset space ~
39878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39880 reference "sec:Index"
39887 \begin_layout Subsection
39891 \begin_layout Standard
39892 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39893 \begin_inset space ~
39897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39899 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39906 \begin_layout Subsection
39910 \begin_layout Standard
39911 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39912 Tables are described in section
39913 \begin_inset space ~
39917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39919 reference "sec:Tables"
39923 and in detail in the chapter
39930 \begin_inset space ~
39938 \begin_layout Subsection
39942 \begin_layout Standard
39948 Graphics are described in section
39949 \begin_inset space ~
39953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39955 reference "sec:Graphics"
39962 \begin_layout Subsection
39966 \begin_layout Standard
39967 Inserts a URL as described in section
39968 \begin_inset space ~
39972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39974 reference "subsec:URLs"
39981 \begin_layout Subsection
39985 \begin_layout Standard
39986 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39987 \begin_inset space ~
39991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39993 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
40000 \begin_layout Subsection
40004 \begin_layout Standard
40005 Inserts a footnote as described in section
40006 \begin_inset space ~
40010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40012 reference "sec:Footnotes"
40019 \begin_layout Subsection
40023 \begin_layout Standard
40024 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
40025 \begin_inset space ~
40029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40031 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
40038 \begin_layout Subsection
40041 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
40044 \begin_layout Standard
40045 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
40046 environments of the same type.
40048 \begin_inset space ~
40052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40054 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
40058 for an explanation.
40061 \begin_layout Subsection
40065 \begin_layout Standard
40066 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
40067 title or caption of a float.
40068 Inserts a short title as described in section
40069 \begin_inset space ~
40073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40075 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
40082 \begin_layout Subsection
40087 \begin_layout Standard
40088 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
40089 Code box as described in section
40090 \begin_inset space ~
40094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40096 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
40103 \begin_layout Subsection
40105 \begin_inset Index idx
40108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40117 \begin_layout Standard
40118 Inserts a program listings box.
40119 Program listings are explained in the chapter
40121 Program Code Listings
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40134 \begin_layout Subsection
40138 \begin_layout Standard
40139 Inserts the actual date.
40140 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
40145 \begin_layout Subsection
40149 \begin_layout Standard
40150 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
40151 \begin_inset space ~
40155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40157 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40164 \begin_layout Section
40166 \begin_inset Index idx
40169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40178 \begin_layout Standard
40179 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
40180 \begin_inset space ~
40183 of the current document.
40184 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
40187 \begin_layout Subsection
40191 \begin_layout Standard
40192 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
40193 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
40194 to jump, for example, between section
40195 \begin_inset space ~
40199 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
40200 \begin_inset space ~
40203 2.5 and use the submenu
40206 \begin_inset space ~
40210 \begin_inset space ~
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40227 \begin_inset space ~
40233 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
40237 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
40243 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
40246 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
40249 \begin_layout Standard
40250 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
40254 \begin_inset space ~
40259 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
40262 \begin_inset space ~
40267 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
40270 \begin_layout Subsection
40271 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
40274 \begin_layout Standard
40275 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
40279 \begin_layout Subsection
40283 \begin_layout Standard
40284 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
40285 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
40286 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
40290 \begin_inset space ~
40294 \begin_inset space ~
40302 \begin_layout Subsection
40306 \begin_layout Standard
40307 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
40310 The \SpecialChar LyX
40311 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
40313 \begin_inset space ~
40321 \begin_inset space ~
40326 manual for a detailed description.
40329 \begin_layout Section
40331 \begin_inset Index idx
40334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40343 \begin_layout Subsection
40347 \begin_layout Standard
40348 Change Tracking is described in section
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40355 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40362 \begin_layout Subsection
40370 \begin_layout Standard
40371 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40372 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40373 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40375 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40376 to the clipboard or update the view.
40377 \begin_inset Newline newline
40380 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40384 \begin_layout Standard
40387 Open Containing Directory
40389 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40390 's temporary folder for the document.
40391 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40392 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40393 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40394 For example some journals require to send the
40398 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40402 \begin_layout Subsection
40403 Start Appendix Here
40406 \begin_layout Standard
40407 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40408 as described in section
40409 \begin_inset space ~
40413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40415 reference "sec:Appendices"
40422 \begin_layout Subsection
40424 \begin_inset space ~
40430 \begin_layout Standard
40431 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40432 default output format for the document (menu
40434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40435 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40436 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40438 \begin_inset space ~
40442 \begin_inset space ~
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40454 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40458 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40461 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40462 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40464 \begin_inset space ~
40467 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40469 \begin_inset space ~
40472 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40474 \begin_inset space ~
40478 \begin_inset space ~
40484 \begin_inset space ~
40488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40490 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40494 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40495 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40498 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40500 \begin_inset space ~
40503 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40508 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40512 \begin_inset space ~
40516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40518 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40523 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40524 when it is first configured.
40525 The default output format is
40528 \begin_inset space ~
40536 \begin_layout Subsection
40537 View (Other Formats)
40540 \begin_layout Standard
40541 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40542 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40543 actual document with an external program.
40544 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40545 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40546 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40548 All possible formats are listed in section
40549 \begin_inset space ~
40553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40555 reference "subsec:Export"
40560 You should at least see the menu entry
40565 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40567 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40569 \begin_inset space ~
40573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40575 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40580 \begin_inset Index idx
40583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40584 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40593 \begin_layout Standard
40594 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40595 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40597 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40598 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40600 \begin_inset space ~
40603 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40605 \begin_inset space ~
40608 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40612 \begin_inset space ~
40616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40618 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40623 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40624 when it is first configured.
40627 \begin_layout Subsection
40629 \begin_inset space ~
40635 \begin_layout Standard
40636 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40637 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40640 \begin_layout Subsection
40641 Update (Other Formats)
40644 \begin_layout Standard
40645 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40646 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40649 \begin_layout Subsection
40650 View Master Document
40653 \begin_layout Standard
40654 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40670 \begin_inset space ~
40675 manual for more information on this topic).
40676 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40677 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40681 \begin_inset space ~
40685 \begin_inset space ~
40690 generates the output of the whole book, while
40694 will just output the chapter alone.
40697 \begin_layout Standard
40698 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40699 in the document settings (menu
40701 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40702 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40703 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40705 \begin_inset space ~
40709 \begin_inset space ~
40715 \begin_inset space ~
40719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40721 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40725 ) or in the preferences (menu
40727 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40728 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40733 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40735 \begin_inset space ~
40738 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40740 \begin_inset space ~
40744 \begin_inset space ~
40750 \begin_inset space ~
40754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40756 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40763 \begin_layout Subsection
40764 Update Master Document
40767 \begin_layout Standard
40768 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40784 \begin_inset space ~
40789 manual for more information on this topic).
40790 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40791 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40794 \begin_layout Standard
40795 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40796 in the document settings (menu
40798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40799 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40800 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40802 \begin_inset space ~
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40812 \begin_inset space ~
40816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40818 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40822 ) or in the preferences (menu
40824 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40825 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40827 \begin_inset space ~
40830 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40832 \begin_inset space ~
40835 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40837 \begin_inset space ~
40841 \begin_inset space ~
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40853 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40860 \begin_layout Subsection
40862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40864 name "subsec:Compressed"
40871 \begin_layout Standard
40872 Un/compresses the current document.
40873 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40874 compression (see the
40876 Additional Features
40878 manual for details).
40881 \begin_layout Subsection
40885 \begin_layout Standard
40886 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40889 \begin_layout Subsection
40893 \begin_layout Standard
40894 The document settings are described in appendix
40895 \begin_inset space ~
40899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40901 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40908 \begin_layout Section
40910 \begin_inset Index idx
40913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40922 \begin_layout Subsection
40926 \begin_layout Standard
40927 Spell checking is explained in section
40928 \begin_inset space ~
40932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40934 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40941 \begin_layout Subsection
40945 \begin_layout Standard
40946 The thesaurus is described in section
40947 \begin_inset space ~
40951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40953 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40960 \begin_layout Subsection
40962 \begin_inset Index idx
40965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40972 \begin_inset Index idx
40975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40984 \begin_layout Standard
40985 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40986 the highlighted document part.
40989 \begin_layout Subsection
40995 \begin_inset Index idx
40998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40999 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41008 \begin_layout Standard
41009 Generates with the help of the program
41011 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
41014 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
41015 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
41016 This feature is not available on Windows.
41019 \begin_layout Subsection
41025 \begin_inset Index idx
41028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41038 \begin_layout Standard
41039 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41049 to see the full filename paths.
41052 \begin_layout Subsection
41054 \begin_inset Index idx
41057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41066 \begin_layout Standard
41067 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
41068 files as described in section
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41075 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
41082 \begin_layout Subsection
41084 \begin_inset Index idx
41087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41100 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41118 \begin_inset Index idx
41121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41122 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41131 \begin_layout Standard
41132 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
41133 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
41134 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41135 -packages and programs it needs; see
41137 \begin_inset space ~
41141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41143 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41150 \begin_layout Subsection
41154 \begin_layout Standard
41159 dialog as described in detail in appendix
41160 \begin_inset space ~
41164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41166 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41173 \begin_layout Section
41175 \begin_inset Index idx
41178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41187 \begin_layout Standard
41188 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
41189 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
41191 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
41195 \begin_layout Standard
41199 \begin_inset space ~
41204 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
41205 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41206 packages and classes found
41207 by \SpecialChar LyX
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41215 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
41222 \begin_layout Standard
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41231 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
41236 \begin_layout Section
41238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41240 name "sec:Toolbars"
41247 \begin_layout Standard
41248 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41255 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
41262 \begin_layout Standard
41263 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
41264 This is described in the
41266 Additional Features
41271 \begin_layout Subsection
41273 \begin_inset Index idx
41276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41285 \begin_layout Standard
41286 \begin_inset Graphics
41287 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
41295 \begin_layout Standard
41296 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41302 \begin_layout Standard
41303 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41320 \begin_inset Note Note
41323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41324 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41329 manual for more information.
41337 \begin_layout Standard
41338 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41344 \begin_layout Standard
41345 \begin_inset Tabular
41346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41347 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41349 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41355 \begin_inset Graphics
41356 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41370 pull-down box for the environments
41383 \begin_layout Standard
41384 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41390 \begin_layout Standard
41392 \begin_inset Tabular
41393 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41394 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41395 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41396 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41420 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41427 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41450 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41457 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41480 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41487 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41496 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41510 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41517 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41526 arg "spelling-continuously"
41534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41538 Spellcheck continuously
41544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41567 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41597 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41627 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41657 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41687 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41694 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41703 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41717 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41743 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41757 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41785 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41799 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41800 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41828 Emphasize text, function of the
41830 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41832 \begin_inset space ~
41835 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41865 Set text to noun style, function of the
41867 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41872 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41890 arg "textstyle-apply"
41898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41902 Format text using the current settings in the
41904 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41906 \begin_inset space ~
41909 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41942 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41944 \begin_inset space ~
41953 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41962 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41976 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41983 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41990 arg "tabular-insert"
41998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42020 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
42028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42032 Toggle outline window on/off,
42034 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42050 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
42058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42062 Toggle math toolbar on/off
42068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42077 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
42085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42089 Toggle table toolbar on/off
42102 \begin_layout Subsection
42104 \begin_inset Index idx
42107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42116 \begin_layout Standard
42117 \begin_inset Graphics
42118 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
42126 \begin_layout Standard
42127 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42133 \begin_layout Standard
42134 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42138 \begin_layout Standard
42139 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42145 \begin_layout Standard
42146 \begin_inset Tabular
42147 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
42148 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42149 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42150 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42151 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42178 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42187 arg "layout Enumerate"
42195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42214 arg "layout Itemize"
42222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42268 arg "layout Description"
42276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42295 arg "depth-increment"
42303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42309 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42311 \begin_inset space ~
42315 \begin_inset space ~
42324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42333 arg "depth-decrement"
42341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42347 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42349 \begin_inset space ~
42353 \begin_inset space ~
42362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42371 arg "float-insert figure"
42379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42385 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42386 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42393 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42402 arg "float-insert table"
42410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42417 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42463 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42493 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42507 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42539 \begin_inset space ~
42548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42557 arg "nomencl-insert"
42565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42573 \begin_inset space ~
42582 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42591 arg "footnote-insert"
42599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42605 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42621 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42635 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42637 \begin_inset space ~
42646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42670 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42672 \begin_inset space ~
42681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42690 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42734 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42766 \begin_inset space ~
42775 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42784 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42799 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42815 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42830 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42850 arg "dialog-show character"
42858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42864 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42866 \begin_inset space ~
42869 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42885 arg "layout-paragraph"
42893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42899 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42901 \begin_inset space ~
42910 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42919 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42933 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42947 \begin_layout Subsection
42948 View/Update Toolbar
42949 \begin_inset Index idx
42952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42953 Toolbar ! View / Update
42961 \begin_layout Standard
42962 \begin_inset Graphics
42963 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42970 \begin_layout Standard
42971 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42977 \begin_layout Standard
42978 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42982 \begin_layout Standard
42983 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42989 \begin_layout Standard
42990 \begin_inset Tabular
42991 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42992 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42993 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42994 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43018 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43034 arg "buffer-update"
43042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43064 arg "master-buffer-view"
43072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43078 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43080 \begin_inset space ~
43089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43098 arg "master-buffer-update"
43106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43112 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43114 \begin_inset space ~
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43127 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43136 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
43144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43151 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43152 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43153 Synchronize with Output
43159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43183 View (Other Formats)
43189 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43196 arg "update-others"
43204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43210 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43211 Update (Other Formats)
43224 \begin_layout Standard
43225 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
43229 \begin_layout Subsection
43233 \begin_layout Standard
43234 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
43235 \begin_inset space ~
43239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43241 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43245 , the table toolbar
43246 \begin_inset Index idx
43249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43258 \begin_inset space ~
43263 manual and the math macro toolbar
43264 \begin_inset Index idx
43267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43280 \begin_layout Chapter
43281 The Document Settings
43282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43284 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43289 \begin_inset Index idx
43292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43293 Document ! Settings
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43305 \begin_inset space ~
43310 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
43311 is called with the menu
43313 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43317 You can save your document settings as default with the
43319 Save as Document Defaults
43321 button in any dialog.
43322 This will create a template named
43326 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
43327 when you create a new document without
43331 \begin_layout Standard
43336 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43337 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43340 \begin_layout Standard
43341 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43342 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43343 to find the one you are looking for.
43344 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43345 the submenus of the dialog.
43347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43351 \begin_inset space \space{}
43355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43362 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43363 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43364 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43367 \begin_layout Section
43371 \begin_layout Standard
43372 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43374 Document classes are described in section
43375 \begin_inset space ~
43379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43381 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43389 \begin_layout Standard
43393 \begin_inset space ~
43398 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43403 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43404 as a layout for a document class.
43405 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43407 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43416 \begin_layout Standard
43417 Some classes use special class options by default.
43418 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43422 and you can decide to use them or not.
43423 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43424 recommended you leave them untouched.
43429 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43430 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43435 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43437 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43443 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43444 \begin_inset Newline newline
43449 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43452 \begin_inset Newline newline
43455 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43456 distribution, see section
43461 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43463 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43476 \begin_layout Standard
43481 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43482 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43483 in the background if the child document
43484 is opened without its master.
43485 This way child documents are always compilable.
43486 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43493 \begin_inset space ~
43501 \begin_layout Standard
43502 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43513 \begin_inset Index idx
43516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43518 packages ! prettyref
43524 \begin_inset Index idx
43527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43529 packages ! refstyle
43534 for cross-references, see section
43535 \begin_inset space ~
43539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43541 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43548 \begin_layout Section
43552 \begin_layout Standard
43553 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43554 Please refer to the section
43557 \begin_inset space ~
43565 \begin_inset space ~
43570 manual for details.
43573 \begin_layout Section
43577 \begin_layout Standard
43578 Modules are explained in section
43579 \begin_inset space ~
43583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43585 reference "subsec:Modules"
43592 \begin_layout Section
43596 \begin_layout Standard
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43604 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43611 \begin_layout Section
43615 \begin_layout Standard
43616 The document font settings are described in section
43617 \begin_inset space ~
43621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43623 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43630 \begin_layout Section
43634 \begin_layout Standard
43635 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43647 \begin_inset space ~
43652 and whether it should be a
43655 \begin_inset space ~
43660 can also be specified here.
43663 \begin_layout Standard
43664 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43665 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43666 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43668 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43671 \begin_layout Standard
43674 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43677 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43678 justifies the text on screen.
43679 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43683 \begin_layout Section
43687 \begin_layout Standard
43688 This dialog is described in sections
43689 \begin_inset space ~
43693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43695 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43702 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43709 \begin_layout Section
43713 \begin_layout Standard
43714 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43715 \begin_inset space ~
43719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43721 reference "subsec:Margins"
43728 \begin_layout Section
43730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43732 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43737 \begin_inset Index idx
43740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43741 Language ! Encoding
43749 \begin_layout Standard
43750 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43751 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43752 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43754 is always encoded in utf8).
43755 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43756 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43757 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43758 -command is not known for
43759 a particular character).
43762 \begin_layout Standard
43763 If you use the option
43768 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43769 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43770 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43772 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43773 exactly one encoding.
43774 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43777 \begin_layout Standard
43779 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43780 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43781 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43782 installation supports Unicode), choose
43783 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43784 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43785 is quite incomplete, so
43786 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43791 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43792 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43793 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43794 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43795 -commands is not used, because all
43796 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43797 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43798 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43799 , two new alternative engines
43800 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43802 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43804 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43807 \begin_inset space ~
43815 \begin_inset space ~
43823 \begin_inset space ~
43829 \begin_inset space ~
43833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43835 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43840 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43844 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43847 \begin_layout Standard
43851 \begin_inset space ~
43856 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43857 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43867 The possible settings are:
43870 \begin_layout Description
43871 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43873 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43874 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43878 \begin_inset space ~
43882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43884 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43891 \begin_layout Description
43892 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43893 format you will use.
43894 In many cases this will be
43899 \begin_inset Index idx
43902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43910 If the newer package
43915 \begin_inset Index idx
43918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43920 packages ! polyglossia
43925 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43926 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43927 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43929 this package will be used instead of
43936 \begin_layout Description
43938 \begin_inset space ~
43949 would be more appropriate.
43952 \begin_layout Description
43953 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43954 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43958 (for German texts), type in
43961 \begin_inset Newline newline
43966 usepackage{ngerman}
43969 \begin_layout Description
43970 None will not use a language package.
43971 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43974 \begin_layout Standard
43975 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43978 \begin_layout Description
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43984 \begin_inset space ~
43988 \begin_inset space ~
43995 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44001 \begin_inset Index idx
44004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44006 packages ! inputenc
44012 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
44013 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
44014 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
44018 \begin_layout Description
44019 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
44021 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
44022 commands, which may result in a big
44023 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
44024 -commands are needed.
44027 \begin_layout Description
44029 \begin_inset space ~
44033 \begin_inset space ~
44036 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
44039 \begin_layout Description
44041 \begin_inset space ~
44045 \begin_inset space ~
44048 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
44051 \begin_layout Description
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44056 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
44059 \begin_layout Description
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44065 \begin_inset space ~
44068 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
44069 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
44072 \begin_layout Description
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44078 \begin_inset space ~
44081 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
44085 \begin_layout Description
44087 \begin_inset space ~
44091 \begin_inset space ~
44094 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
44095 ISO-8859-13 encoding
44098 \begin_layout Description
44100 \begin_inset space ~
44104 \begin_inset space ~
44108 \begin_inset space ~
44111 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
44112 \begin_inset space ~
44118 \begin_layout Description
44120 \begin_inset space ~
44124 \begin_inset space ~
44128 \begin_inset space ~
44131 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
44132 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
44135 \begin_layout Description
44137 \begin_inset space ~
44141 \begin_inset space ~
44144 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
44145 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
44146 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44147 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
44148 \begin_inset space ~
44152 \begin_inset space ~
44158 \begin_layout Description
44160 \begin_inset space ~
44164 \begin_inset space ~
44167 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
44168 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
44169 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44171 should try to use the encoding Unicode
44172 \begin_inset space ~
44176 \begin_inset space ~
44182 \begin_layout Description
44184 \begin_inset space ~
44188 \begin_inset space ~
44191 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
44194 \begin_layout Description
44196 \begin_inset space ~
44200 \begin_inset space ~
44203 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
44206 \begin_layout Description
44208 \begin_inset space ~
44212 \begin_inset space ~
44215 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
44218 \begin_layout Description
44220 \begin_inset space ~
44223 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
44226 \begin_layout Description
44228 \begin_inset space ~
44231 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
44234 \begin_layout Description
44236 \begin_inset space ~
44240 \begin_inset space ~
44243 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
44246 \begin_layout Description
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44258 \begin_layout Description
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44264 \begin_inset space ~
44267 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
44270 \begin_layout Description
44272 \begin_inset space ~
44276 \begin_inset space ~
44282 \begin_layout Description
44284 \begin_inset space ~
44288 \begin_inset space ~
44291 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44297 \begin_inset Index idx
44300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44307 , when using this, set the document language to
44312 \begin_layout Description
44314 \begin_inset space ~
44318 \begin_inset space ~
44321 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44326 , when using this, set the document language to
44329 \begin_inset space ~
44335 \begin_layout Description
44337 \begin_inset space ~
44341 \begin_inset space ~
44344 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44350 \begin_inset Index idx
44353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44355 packages ! japanese
44360 , when using this, set the document language to
44365 \begin_layout Description
44367 \begin_inset space ~
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44374 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44379 , when using this, set the document language to
44384 \begin_layout Description
44386 \begin_inset space ~
44390 \begin_inset space ~
44393 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44398 , when using this, set the document language to
44403 \begin_layout Description
44405 \begin_inset space ~
44408 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44411 \begin_layout Description
44413 \begin_inset space ~
44417 \begin_inset space ~
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44424 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44427 \begin_layout Description
44429 \begin_inset space ~
44433 \begin_inset space ~
44437 \begin_inset space ~
44440 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44441 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44442 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44445 \begin_layout Description
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44451 \begin_inset space ~
44457 \begin_layout Description
44459 \begin_inset space ~
44463 \begin_inset space ~
44466 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44467 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44470 \begin_layout Description
44472 \begin_inset space ~
44476 \begin_inset space ~
44479 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44485 \begin_inset Index idx
44488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44495 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44498 \begin_layout Description
44500 \begin_inset space ~
44508 \begin_inset space ~
44511 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44518 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44521 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44528 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44529 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44531 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44534 \begin_layout Description
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44540 \begin_inset space ~
44543 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44549 \begin_inset Index idx
44552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44559 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44562 \begin_layout Description
44564 \begin_inset space ~
44567 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44573 \begin_inset Index idx
44576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44578 packages ! inputenc
44584 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44588 \begin_layout Description
44590 \begin_inset space ~
44594 \begin_inset space ~
44598 \begin_inset space ~
44601 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44602 \begin_inset space ~
44608 \begin_layout Description
44610 \begin_inset space ~
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44618 \begin_inset space ~
44621 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44622 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44623 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44627 \begin_layout Description
44629 \begin_inset space ~
44633 \begin_inset space ~
44637 \begin_inset space ~
44640 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44641 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44644 \begin_layout Section
44646 \begin_inset Index idx
44649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44656 \begin_inset Index idx
44659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44666 \begin_inset Index idx
44669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44670 Color ! Shaded boxes
44676 \begin_inset Index idx
44679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44680 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44688 \begin_layout Standard
44689 Here you can alter the font color for the
44693 (default: black), for
44696 \begin_inset space ~
44701 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44705 (default: white) and for
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44718 sets the color back to the default.
44721 \begin_layout Standard
44722 Clicking any button showing
44730 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44731 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44732 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44733 later more quickly.
44736 \begin_layout Standard
44737 Note, if you change the
44740 \begin_inset space ~
44745 font color and use the option
44748 \begin_inset space ~
44753 in the document settings under
44756 \begin_inset space ~
44761 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44762 \begin_inset space ~
44766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44768 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44775 \begin_layout Standard
44776 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44782 \begin_layout Standard
44786 \begin_inset space ~
44795 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44798 \begin_inset space ~
44801 Code after a forced page break:
44804 \begin_layout Itemize
44805 For the page color:
44806 \begin_inset Newline newline
44813 pagecolor{color name}
44816 \begin_layout Itemize
44817 For the text color:
44818 \begin_inset Newline newline
44828 \begin_layout Standard
44829 You are restricted to one of
44865 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44872 \begin_inset space ~
44878 \begin_inset Newline newline
44881 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44882 names to refer to them:
44885 \begin_layout Itemize
44891 \begin_inset Newline newline
44896 page_backgroundcolor
44899 \begin_layout Itemize
44903 \begin_inset space ~
44909 \begin_inset Newline newline
44917 \begin_layout Itemize
44921 \begin_inset space ~
44927 \begin_inset Newline newline
44935 \begin_layout Itemize
44939 \begin_inset space ~
44945 \begin_inset Newline newline
44953 \begin_layout Standard
44954 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44965 \begin_inset space ~
44973 \begin_layout Section
44977 \begin_layout Standard
44978 Here you can adjust the
44982 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44986 as described in section
44987 \begin_inset space ~
44991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44993 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
45000 \begin_layout Section
45004 \begin_layout Standard
45005 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45011 \begin_inset Index idx
45014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45016 packages ! biblatex
45026 \begin_inset Index idx
45029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45041 \begin_inset Index idx
45044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45052 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45055 Sectioned bibliography
45057 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45063 \begin_inset Index idx
45066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45068 packages ! bibtopic
45078 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
45079 Finally, you can select a document-specific
45083 for the generation of the bibliography.
45084 For a further description of these possibilities see section
45085 \begin_inset space ~
45089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45091 reference "sec:Bibliography"
45098 \begin_layout Section
45102 \begin_layout Standard
45103 Here you can define the
45107 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45115 reference "sec:Index"
45122 \begin_layout Section
45126 \begin_layout Standard
45127 The PDF properties are explained in section
45128 \begin_inset space ~
45132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45134 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45141 \begin_layout Section
45145 \begin_layout Standard
45146 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
45147 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45153 \begin_inset Index idx
45156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45168 \begin_inset Index idx
45171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45183 \begin_inset Index idx
45186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45198 \begin_inset Index idx
45201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45213 \begin_inset Index idx
45216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45218 packages ! mathdots
45228 \begin_inset Index idx
45231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45233 packages ! mathtools
45243 \begin_inset Index idx
45246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45258 \begin_inset Index idx
45261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45263 packages ! stackrel
45273 \begin_inset Index idx
45276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45278 packages ! stmaryrd
45288 \begin_inset Index idx
45291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45293 packages ! undertilde
45298 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45301 \begin_layout Description
45302 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45303 -errors in formulas,
45304 ensure that you have this enabled.
45307 \begin_layout Description
45308 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45309 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45310 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45314 \begin_layout Description
45315 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45318 \begin_inset space ~
45330 \begin_layout Description
45331 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45334 \begin_inset space ~
45346 \begin_layout Description
45347 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45358 \begin_layout Description
45359 mathtools is used for the math commands
45395 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45402 \begin_layout Description
45403 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45405 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45414 \begin_layout Description
45415 stackrel is used for the math command
45432 \begin_layout Description
45433 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45436 \begin_layout Description
45437 undertilde is used for the math command
45445 Accents for one Character
45454 \begin_layout Section
45458 \begin_layout Standard
45459 The float placement options are described in the section
45462 \begin_inset space ~
45470 \begin_inset space ~
45478 \begin_layout Section
45482 \begin_layout Standard
45483 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45485 Program Code Listings
45490 \begin_inset space ~
45498 \begin_layout Section
45502 \begin_layout Standard
45503 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45511 set to be used and set the
45516 The itemize environment is described in section
45517 \begin_inset space ~
45521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45523 reference "sec:Itemize"
45530 \begin_layout Standard
45531 You can furthermore specify a
45534 \begin_inset space ~
45539 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45540 command of the desired character.
45541 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45548 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45554 \begin_inset space \space{}
45558 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45568 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45569 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45572 \begin_layout Standard
45573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45581 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45582 -packages in the preamble (menu
45585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45586 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45589 \begin_inset space ~
45595 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45599 usepackage{textcomp}
45602 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45606 usepackage{amssymb}
45616 \begin_layout Section
45620 \begin_layout Standard
45621 Branches are described in section
45622 \begin_inset space ~
45626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45628 reference "sec:Branches"
45635 \begin_layout Section
45637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45639 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45646 \begin_layout Standard
45647 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45650 \begin_layout Description
45652 \begin_inset space ~
45656 \begin_inset space ~
45659 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45679 View Master Document
45680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45687 Update Master Document
45688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45695 menu or the toolbar.
45696 The default is set in
45698 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45699 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45701 \begin_inset space ~
45704 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45708 \begin_inset space ~
45712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45714 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45721 \begin_layout Description
45723 \begin_inset space ~
45727 \begin_inset space ~
45730 Output settings for the menu
45732 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45734 \begin_inset space ~
45740 For a detailed description see section
45742 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45747 \begin_inset space ~
45755 \begin_layout Description
45757 \begin_inset space ~
45761 \begin_inset space ~
45764 Options offers settings for the export format
45772 \begin_inset space ~
45777 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45778 \begin_inset space ~
45781 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45785 \begin_inset space ~
45790 settings are described in detail in section
45792 Math Output in XHTML
45797 \begin_inset space ~
45806 \begin_inset space ~
45810 \begin_inset space ~
45815 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45818 \begin_layout Description
45820 \begin_inset space ~
45825 Save transient properties
45827 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45828 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45829 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45833 \begin_layout Itemize
45834 the activation of change tracking
45837 \begin_layout Itemize
45838 the output of tracked changes
45841 \begin_layout Itemize
45842 the recording of the document directory path.
45845 \begin_layout Standard
45846 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45847 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45851 \begin_layout Section
45859 \begin_layout Standard
45860 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45862 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45864 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45866 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45870 \begin_layout Standard
45871 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45872 -syntax is given in section
45873 \begin_inset space ~
45877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45879 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45886 \begin_layout Chapter
45892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45894 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45899 \begin_inset Index idx
45902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45911 \begin_layout Standard
45912 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45914 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45918 It has the following submenus.
45921 \begin_layout Section
45925 \begin_layout Subsection
45929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45930 User Interface File
45931 \begin_inset Index idx
45934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45935 Customization ! of toolbars
45941 \begin_inset Index idx
45944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45945 Customization ! of menus
45953 \begin_layout Standard
45954 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45955 interface (ui) file.
45956 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45964 \begin_layout Description
45969 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45972 \begin_layout Description
45979 the menu entries in popup context menus
45982 \begin_layout Description
45987 specifies the toolbar buttons
45990 \begin_layout Standard
45991 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45992 and edit the entries.
45995 \begin_layout Standard
45996 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
46008 entries must be finished with an explicit
46033 and in the case of the
46034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46046 The syntax for the entries is:
46049 \begin_layout Standard
46050 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46079 \begin_layout Standard
46081 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46084 All the \SpecialChar LyX
46085 -functions are listed in the menu
46087 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
46089 \begin_inset space ~
46097 \begin_layout Standard
46098 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46104 \begin_layout Standard
46105 For example, assuming you use the menu
46107 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46110 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
46114 \begin_layout Standard
46115 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46139 \begin_layout Standard
46141 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
46145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46156 to have the sixth bookmark.
46159 \begin_layout Standard
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46168 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
46169 's toolbar buttons.
46170 The currently available icon sets are compared in
46171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46174 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
46182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46186 \begin_layout Standard
46189 Enable tool tips in main work area
46191 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
46195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46199 \begin_layout Standard
46204 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
46205 should display in the menu
46207 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46209 \begin_inset space ~
46217 \begin_layout Subsection
46221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46225 \begin_layout Standard
46228 Restore window layouts and geometries
46231 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
46232 the last \SpecialChar LyX
46236 \begin_layout Standard
46239 Restore cursor positions
46241 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
46245 \begin_layout Standard
46248 Load opened files from last session
46250 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
46254 \begin_layout Standard
46257 Clear all session information
46259 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
46260 sessions (cursor positions, names
46261 of last opened documents, etc.).
46264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46268 name "subsec:Backup documents"
46273 \begin_inset Index idx
46276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46285 \begin_layout Standard
46288 Backup original documents when saving
46290 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
46291 it was saved the last time.
46292 It is stored in the
46295 \begin_inset space ~
46301 \begin_inset space ~
46305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46307 reference "sec:Paths"
46311 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46314 \begin_inset space ~
46320 The backup file has the file extension
46321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46335 \begin_layout Standard
46338 Backup documents, every
46340 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46343 \begin_layout Standard
46346 Save documents compressed by default
46348 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46349 \begin_inset space ~
46353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46355 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46360 This applies to newly created documents only.
46361 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46365 Windows & work area
46368 \begin_layout Standard
46371 Open documents in tabs
46373 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46377 \begin_layout Standard
46382 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46389 \begin_inset space ~
46393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46395 reference "sec:Paths"
46399 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46406 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46407 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46408 of \SpecialChar LyX
46410 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46411 instance is created for each file.
46414 \begin_layout Standard
46417 Single close-tab button
46419 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46429 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46430 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46431 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
46435 \begin_layout Standard
46436 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46444 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46445 before the change takes effect.
46453 \begin_layout Standard
46458 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46460 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46462 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46466 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46467 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46468 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46471 \begin_layout Subsection
46473 \begin_inset Index idx
46476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46485 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46492 \begin_layout Standard
46493 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46497 \begin_layout Standard
46498 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46506 This section only deals with the fonts
46510 the \SpecialChar LyX
46512 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46515 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46516 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46527 \begin_layout Standard
46528 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46545 (depends on the system) as its
46548 \begin_inset space ~
46564 \begin_layout Standard
46565 You can change the font size with the
46572 \begin_layout Standard
46577 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46579 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46582 points have the size of 1
46583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46587 \begin_inset space ~
46591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46593 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46598 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46603 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46604 \begin_inset space ~
46608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46610 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46617 \begin_layout Subsection
46619 \begin_inset Index idx
46622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46623 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46630 \begin_inset Index idx
46633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46642 \begin_layout Standard
46643 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46644 by choosing an item in the
46645 list and selecting the
46652 \begin_layout Standard
46653 By checking the option
46657 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46660 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46661 \begin_inset space ~
46665 \begin_inset space ~
46670 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46673 \begin_layout Subsection
46675 \begin_inset Index idx
46678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46687 \begin_layout Standard
46688 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46692 \begin_layout Standard
46697 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46698 This feature is described in section
46699 \begin_inset space ~
46703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46705 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46712 \begin_layout Standard
46713 Checking the option
46716 \begin_inset space ~
46720 \begin_inset space ~
46724 \begin_inset space ~
46729 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46732 \begin_layout Section
46734 \begin_inset Index idx
46737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46746 \begin_layout Subsection
46750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46754 \begin_layout Standard
46757 Cursor follows scrollbar
46759 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46763 \begin_layout Standard
46764 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46765 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46766 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46769 \begin_layout Standard
46772 Scroll below end of document
46774 is self-explanatory.
46777 \begin_layout Standard
46778 In \SpecialChar LyX
46779 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46786 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46788 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46789 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46792 \begin_layout Standard
46795 Sort environments alphabetically
46797 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46800 \begin_layout Standard
46803 Group environments by their category
46805 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46808 \begin_layout Standard
46813 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46828 \begin_layout Standard
46829 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46834 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46835 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46839 \begin_layout Subsection
46841 \begin_inset Index idx
46844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46851 \begin_inset Index idx
46854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46855 Settings ! Shortcuts
46863 \begin_layout Standard
46868 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46870 Several binding files are available, among them:
46873 \begin_layout Description
46874 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46877 \begin_layout Description
46878 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46890 \begin_layout Description
46891 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46902 \begin_layout Standard
46903 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46908 , and binding files for special languages.
46909 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46914 \begin_inset space \space{}
46918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46926 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46927 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46928 will try to use the appropriate binding
46932 \begin_layout Standard
46933 Some binding files, like
46937 , only have a limited scope.
46938 When looking at the end of the file
46942 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46945 \begin_layout Standard
46949 \begin_inset space ~
46953 \begin_inset space ~
46958 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46959 in the selected key binding file.
46962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46966 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46971 \begin_inset Index idx
46974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46975 Key Bindings ! Editing
46983 \begin_layout Standard
46984 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46985 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46986 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46987 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46990 Show key-bindings containing
46993 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46994 Insert there for example as keyword
46995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47002 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
47003 functions that contain
47004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47012 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
47013 All \SpecialChar LyX
47014 functions are also listed in the file
47019 that you will find in the
47026 \begin_layout Standard
47027 For example, to add the shortcut
47035 , select the function and press the
47040 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
47041 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
47044 \begin_layout Standard
47045 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
47046 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
47048 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
47049 function names as a semicolon separated list.
47051 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
47056 \begin_layout Standard
47057 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
47060 \begin_layout Standard
47061 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
47063 The syntax of the entries is:
47066 \begin_layout Standard
47072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47091 \begin_layout Standard
47092 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
47093 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
47094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47121 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
47122 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
47123 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
47124 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
47126 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
47130 , you needed to specify it as
47135 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
47138 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
47141 \begin_layout Subsection
47143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47145 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
47150 \begin_inset Index idx
47153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47160 \begin_inset Index idx
47163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47164 Settings ! Keyboard Map
47172 \begin_layout Standard
47173 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
47174 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
47175 provides keyboard maps.
47176 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
47177 is a Romanian one, you can enable
47180 \begin_inset space ~
47184 \begin_inset space ~
47189 and select the keyboard map file named
47196 \begin_layout Standard
47205 keyboard map and, if you use the
47209 bindings, you can select the first and second with
47212 arg "keymap-primary"
47218 arg "keymap-secondary"
47221 respectively or toggle between them with
47224 arg "keymap-toggle"
47230 \begin_layout Standard
47231 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47239 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
47248 \begin_layout Standard
47249 You can also specify the mouse
47251 Wheel scrolling speed
47254 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
47258 Middle mouse button pasting
47260 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
47261 inserts the content of the clipboard.
47264 \begin_layout Standard
47272 \begin_inset space ~
47276 \begin_inset space ~
47281 you can select a key for zooming.
47282 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
47285 \begin_layout Subsection
47289 \begin_layout Standard
47290 Input completion is described in section
47291 \begin_inset space ~
47295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47297 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
47304 \begin_layout Section
47306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47313 \begin_inset Index idx
47316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47323 \begin_inset Index idx
47326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47335 \begin_layout Standard
47336 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47337 are normally determined during
47339 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47342 \begin_layout Description
47344 \begin_inset space ~
47347 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47348 's working directory.
47349 It is the default when you
47360 \begin_inset space ~
47368 \begin_layout Description
47370 \begin_inset space ~
47373 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47375 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47377 \begin_inset space ~
47381 \begin_inset space ~
47389 \begin_layout Description
47391 \begin_inset space ~
47394 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47400 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47404 \begin_inset Newline newline
47408 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47420 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47421 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47429 \begin_layout Description
47431 \begin_inset space ~
47435 \begin_inset Index idx
47438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47444 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47445 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47446 \begin_inset space ~
47450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47452 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47460 will be used to save the backups.
47461 \begin_inset Newline newline
47464 Backup files have the ending
47465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47475 \begin_layout Description
47477 \begin_inset space ~
47480 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47481 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47483 \begin_inset Newline newline
47490 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47496 You can edit this file with the program
47505 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47506 in its preferences under
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47515 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47520 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47522 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47523 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47529 and \SpecialChar LyX
47530 need to be running the same time.
47531 \begin_inset Newline newline
47534 The pipe is also used for the
47538 feature, see section
47539 \begin_inset space ~
47543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47545 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47550 \begin_inset Newline newline
47553 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47554 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47555 \begin_inset Newline newline
47571 \begin_layout Description
47573 \begin_inset space ~
47576 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47579 \begin_layout Description
47581 \begin_inset space ~
47584 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47585 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47586 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47589 \begin_layout Description
47591 \begin_inset space ~
47594 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47600 You only need to specify it if you are using
47604 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47606 For \SpecialChar LyX
47611 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47615 \begin_layout Description
47617 \begin_inset space ~
47620 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47621 When \SpecialChar LyX
47622 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47623 to find it on the system.
47624 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47626 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47635 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47636 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47639 \begin_layout Description
47641 \begin_inset space ~
47644 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47645 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47646 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47647 code or in the document
47649 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47651 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47652 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47653 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47654 scanned for the input files.
47655 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47656 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47658 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47659 compilation may fail for some documents.
47662 \begin_layout Section
47666 \begin_layout Standard
47667 Here you can insert your
47676 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47678 \begin_inset space ~
47682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47684 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47688 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47691 \begin_layout Section
47693 \begin_inset Index idx
47696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47697 Language ! Settings
47703 \begin_inset Index idx
47706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47707 Settings ! Language
47715 \begin_layout Subsection
47717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47719 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47726 \begin_layout Description
47728 \begin_inset space ~
47732 \begin_inset space ~
47735 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47737 You can find its actual translation status here:
47738 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47740 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47748 \begin_layout Description
47750 \begin_inset space ~
47753 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47754 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47755 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47756 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47773 The most widespread language package is
47778 \begin_inset Index idx
47781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47788 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47790 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47791 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47792 come with the alternative
47798 \begin_inset Index idx
47801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47803 packages ! polyglossia
47808 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47809 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47815 The available selections are described in section
47816 \begin_inset space ~
47820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47822 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47829 \begin_layout Description
47831 \begin_inset space ~
47834 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47835 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47836 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47837 An example is the start command
47843 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47845 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47849 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47865 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47870 \begin_layout Description
47872 \begin_inset space ~
47880 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47881 command toggles the package on and off.
47884 \begin_layout Description
47886 \begin_inset space ~
47890 \begin_inset space ~
47893 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47897 \begin_layout Description
47899 \begin_inset space ~
47903 \begin_inset space ~
47906 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47910 \begin_layout Description
47912 \begin_inset space ~
47916 \begin_inset space ~
47919 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47920 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47921 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47923 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47930 \begin_layout Description
47932 \begin_inset space ~
47935 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47937 When this option is not set, the
47940 \begin_inset space ~
47945 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47947 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47950 \begin_inset space ~
47958 \begin_layout Description
47960 \begin_inset space ~
47966 \begin_inset space ~
47972 When it is not set, the
47975 \begin_inset space ~
47980 is set to the end of the document.
47983 \begin_layout Description
47985 \begin_inset space ~
47989 \begin_inset space ~
47992 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47993 language will be underlined in blue.
47996 \begin_layout Description
47998 \begin_inset space ~
48002 \begin_inset space ~
48005 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
48006 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
48009 \begin_layout Description
48011 \begin_inset space ~
48014 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
48015 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
48016 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
48017 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
48020 \begin_layout Subsection
48024 \begin_layout Standard
48025 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
48026 \begin_inset space ~
48030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48032 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
48039 \begin_layout Section
48043 \begin_layout Subsection
48045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48047 name "subsec:General-output"
48054 \begin_layout Description
48056 \begin_inset space ~
48059 search Commands that will be used for the menu
48061 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48063 \begin_inset space ~
48069 For a detailed description see section
48071 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48076 \begin_inset space ~
48084 \begin_layout Description
48086 \begin_inset space ~
48089 Options Options for the program
48093 that is used for the export format
48098 \begin_inset space ~
48102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48104 reference "subsec:Export"
48109 Possible options are listed in the
48114 \begin_inset Newline newline
48118 \begin_inset Flex URL
48121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48123 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
48133 \begin_layout Description
48135 \begin_inset space ~
48139 \begin_inset space ~
48142 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
48145 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48146 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
48148 \begin_inset space ~
48154 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
48157 \begin_layout Description
48159 \begin_inset space ~
48163 \begin_inset Index idx
48166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48173 \begin_inset Index idx
48176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48177 Settings ! Date format
48182 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
48183 \begin_inset Newline newline
48187 \begin_inset Flex URL
48190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48192 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
48198 \begin_inset Newline newline
48201 For example the format
48202 \begin_inset Newline newline
48206 \begin_inset Newline newline
48209 prints the date as day/month/year.
48212 \begin_layout Description
48214 \begin_inset space ~
48218 \begin_inset space ~
48221 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
48222 is allowed to overwrite on export.
48225 \begin_layout Subsection
48231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48233 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
48238 \begin_inset Index idx
48241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48242 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
48251 \begin_layout Description
48253 \begin_inset space ~
48261 \begin_inset space ~
48265 \begin_inset space ~
48268 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
48273 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
48294 are used for Cyrillic.
48295 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
48296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48308 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
48310 sets up in the background.
48311 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
48314 \begin_layout Description
48316 \begin_inset space ~
48320 \begin_inset space ~
48324 \begin_inset space ~
48328 \begin_inset space ~
48331 options They only have an effect when the program
48335 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48338 \begin_layout Standard
48339 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48340 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48341 manuals of the applications.
48344 \begin_layout Description
48346 \begin_inset space ~
48349 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48350 \begin_inset space ~
48354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48356 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48363 \begin_layout Description
48365 \begin_inset space ~
48368 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48369 \begin_inset space ~
48373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48375 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48382 \begin_layout Description
48384 \begin_inset space ~
48387 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48388 \begin_inset space ~
48392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48394 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48401 \begin_layout Description
48407 \begin_inset space ~
48410 command Command for the program
48412 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48415 that is described in the section
48417 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48422 Additional Features
48427 \begin_layout Standard
48428 There are additionally the following options:
48431 \begin_layout Description
48433 \begin_inset space ~
48437 \begin_inset space ~
48441 \begin_inset space ~
48445 \begin_inset space ~
48450 \begin_inset space ~
48453 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48471 to separate folders.
48472 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48474 \begin_inset Index idx
48477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48484 \begin_inset Index idx
48487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48496 \begin_layout Description
48498 \begin_inset space ~
48502 \begin_inset space ~
48506 \begin_inset space ~
48510 \begin_inset space ~
48514 \begin_inset space ~
48518 \begin_inset space ~
48521 changes Removes all manually set
48527 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48528 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48530 \begin_inset space ~
48535 dialog when changing the document class.
48538 \begin_layout Section
48540 \begin_inset space ~
48544 \begin_inset Index idx
48547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48556 \begin_layout Subsection
48558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48560 name "subsec:Converters"
48565 \begin_inset Index idx
48568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48577 \begin_layout Standard
48578 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48579 from one format to another.
48580 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48581 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48588 \begin_inset space ~
48593 field and press the
48598 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48602 \begin_inset space ~
48607 drop-down list, modify the
48611 field and press the
48618 \begin_layout Standard
48621 Converter File Cache
48627 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48629 Maximum Age (in days
48632 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48633 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48636 \begin_layout Standard
48637 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48638 definition, is described in the section
48649 \begin_layout Subsection
48651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48653 name "sec:File-Formats"
48658 \begin_inset Index idx
48661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48668 \begin_inset Index idx
48671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48680 \begin_layout Standard
48681 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48691 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48694 \begin_layout Standard
48695 You can also define the
48697 Default output format
48699 that is used when you use
48701 View, Update, View Master Document
48705 Update Master Document
48711 menu or the toolbar.
48714 \begin_layout Standard
48715 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48726 \begin_layout Standard
48727 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48729 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48730 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48731 This is done by specifying a
48736 More about this is described in the section
48747 \begin_layout Chapter
48748 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48750 \begin_inset Index idx
48753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48762 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48769 \begin_layout Standard
48771 \begin_inset space ~
48775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48777 reference "tab:Units"
48781 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48782 and used in this documentation.
48785 \begin_layout Standard
48786 \begin_inset Float table
48792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48793 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48811 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48819 \begin_inset Tabular
48820 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48821 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48822 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48823 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48824 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48977 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49248 scaled point (65536
49249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49316 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
49321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49440 % of original image width
49445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49529 \begin_layout Standard
49530 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49533 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49540 \begin_layout Bibliography
49541 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49542 LatexCommand bibitem
49549 The \SpecialChar LyX
49551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49554 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49560 \begin_inset Newline newline
49564 \begin_inset Flex URL
49567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49569 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49577 \begin_layout Bibliography
49578 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49579 LatexCommand bibitem
49580 key "latexcompanion"
49585 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49587 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49588 Companion Second Edition.
49591 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49594 \begin_layout Bibliography
49595 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49596 LatexCommand bibitem
49602 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49605 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49609 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49612 \begin_layout Bibliography
49613 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49614 LatexCommand bibitem
49623 : A Document Preparation System.
49626 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49629 \begin_layout Bibliography
49630 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49631 LatexCommand bibitem
49641 The \SpecialChar TeX
49645 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49648 \begin_layout Bibliography
49649 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49650 LatexCommand bibitem
49656 The \SpecialChar TeX
49658 \begin_inset Newline newline
49662 \begin_inset Flex URL
49665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49667 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49675 \begin_layout Bibliography
49676 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49677 LatexCommand bibitem
49683 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49685 \begin_inset Newline newline
49689 \begin_inset Flex URL
49692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49694 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49702 \begin_layout Bibliography
49703 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49704 LatexCommand bibitem
49711 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49713 name "Documentation"
49714 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49721 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49725 \begin_inset Newline newline
49729 \begin_inset Flex URL
49732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49734 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49742 \begin_layout Bibliography
49743 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49744 LatexCommand bibitem
49751 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49753 name "Documentation"
49754 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49759 how to use the program
49761 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49765 \begin_inset Newline newline
49769 \begin_inset Flex URL
49772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49774 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49782 \begin_layout Bibliography
49783 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49784 LatexCommand bibitem
49791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49793 name "Documentation"
49794 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49799 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49805 \begin_inset Index idx
49808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49810 packages ! biblatex
49816 \begin_inset Newline newline
49820 \begin_inset Flex URL
49823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49825 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49833 \begin_layout Bibliography
49834 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49835 LatexCommand bibitem
49842 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49844 name "Documentation"
49845 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49850 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49856 \begin_inset Index idx
49859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49867 \begin_inset Newline newline
49871 \begin_inset Flex URL
49874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49876 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49884 \begin_layout Bibliography
49885 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49886 LatexCommand bibitem
49893 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49895 name "Documentation"
49896 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49906 \begin_inset Newline newline
49910 \begin_inset Flex URL
49913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49915 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49923 \begin_layout Bibliography
49924 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49925 LatexCommand bibitem
49926 key "makeindex-man"
49932 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49935 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49945 \begin_inset Newline newline
49949 \begin_inset Flex URL
49952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49954 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49962 \begin_layout Bibliography
49963 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49964 LatexCommand bibitem
49971 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49973 name "Documentation"
49974 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49984 \begin_inset Newline newline
49988 \begin_inset Flex URL
49991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49993 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
50001 \begin_layout Bibliography
50002 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50003 LatexCommand bibitem
50010 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50012 name "Documentation"
50013 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
50018 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
50020 \begin_inset Newline newline
50024 \begin_inset Flex URL
50027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50029 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
50037 \begin_layout Bibliography
50038 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50039 LatexCommand bibitem
50046 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50048 name "Documentation"
50049 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
50054 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50060 \begin_inset Index idx
50063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50071 \begin_inset Newline newline
50075 \begin_inset Flex URL
50078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50080 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
50088 \begin_layout Bibliography
50089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50090 LatexCommand bibitem
50097 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50099 name "Documentation"
50100 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
50105 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50111 \begin_inset Index idx
50114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50116 packages ! enumitem
50122 \begin_inset Newline newline
50126 \begin_inset Flex URL
50129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50131 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
50139 \begin_layout Bibliography
50140 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50141 LatexCommand bibitem
50148 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50150 name "Documentation"
50151 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
50156 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50162 \begin_inset Index idx
50165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50167 packages ! fancyhdr
50173 \begin_inset Newline newline
50177 \begin_inset Flex URL
50180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50182 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
50190 \begin_layout Bibliography
50191 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50192 LatexCommand bibitem
50199 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50201 name "Documentation"
50202 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
50207 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50213 \begin_inset Index idx
50216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50218 packages ! hyperref
50224 \begin_inset Newline newline
50228 \begin_inset Flex URL
50231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50233 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
50241 \begin_layout Bibliography
50242 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50243 LatexCommand bibitem
50250 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50252 name "Documentation"
50253 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
50258 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50264 \begin_inset Index idx
50267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50269 packages ! microtpye
50275 \begin_inset Newline newline
50279 \begin_inset Flex URL
50282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50284 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
50292 \begin_layout Bibliography
50293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50294 LatexCommand bibitem
50301 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50303 name "Documentation"
50304 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
50309 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50315 \begin_inset Index idx
50318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50326 \begin_inset Newline newline
50330 \begin_inset Flex URL
50333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50335 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50343 \begin_layout Bibliography
50344 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50345 LatexCommand bibitem
50352 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50354 name "Documentation"
50355 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50360 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50366 \begin_inset Index idx
50369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50371 packages ! prettyref
50377 \begin_inset Newline newline
50381 \begin_inset Flex URL
50384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50386 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50394 \begin_layout Bibliography
50395 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50396 LatexCommand bibitem
50403 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50405 name "Documentation"
50406 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50411 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50417 \begin_inset Index idx
50420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50422 packages ! refstyle
50428 \begin_inset Newline newline
50432 \begin_inset Flex URL
50435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50437 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50445 \begin_layout Bibliography
50446 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50447 LatexCommand bibitem
50454 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50457 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50462 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50464 \begin_inset Newline newline
50468 \begin_inset Flex URL
50471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50473 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50481 \begin_layout Bibliography
50482 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50483 LatexCommand bibitem
50490 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50493 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50498 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50500 \begin_inset Newline newline
50504 \begin_inset Flex URL
50507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50509 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50517 \begin_layout Bibliography
50518 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50519 LatexCommand bibitem
50526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50529 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50534 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50535 for Cyrillic languages:
50536 \begin_inset Newline newline
50540 \begin_inset Flex URL
50543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50545 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50553 \begin_layout Bibliography
50554 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50555 LatexCommand bibitem
50562 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50565 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50570 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50572 \begin_inset Newline newline
50576 \begin_inset Flex URL
50579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50581 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50589 \begin_layout Bibliography
50590 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50591 LatexCommand bibitem
50598 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50601 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50606 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50608 \begin_inset Newline newline
50612 \begin_inset Flex URL
50615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50617 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50625 \begin_layout Bibliography
50626 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50627 LatexCommand bibitem
50634 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50637 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50642 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50644 \begin_inset Newline newline
50648 \begin_inset Flex URL
50651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50653 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50661 \begin_layout Standard
50662 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50696 \begin_inset Note Note
50699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50706 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50707 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50708 bibliography is the second one:
50716 \begin_layout Standard
50717 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50718 LatexCommand bibtex
50719 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50720 options "biblio/alphadin"
50727 \begin_layout Standard
50728 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50732 \begin_layout Standard
50736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50742 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50751 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50759 \begin_inset Note Note
50762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50763 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50764 \begin_inset space ~
50768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50770 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50782 \begin_layout Standard
50783 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50784 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50790 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50791 LatexCommand printindex